+ All Categories
Home > Documents > DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL...

DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL...

Date post: 17-Aug-2021
Category:
Upload: others
View: 2 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
312
3Y=l waia no. 3T3; DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF EUTECTIC AND COMPOSITE SOLDER/COPPER JOINTS DISSERTATION Presented to the Graduate Council of the University of North Texas in Partial Fulfillment of the Requirements For the Degree of DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY By Yujing Wu, B.S., M.S. Denton, Texas May, 1994
Transcript
Page 1: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

3Y=l

w a i a

no. 3T3 ;

DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF EUTECTIC AND

COMPOSITE SOLDER/COPPER JOINTS

DISSERTATION

Presented to the Graduate Council of the

University of North Texas in Partial

Fulfillment of the Requirements

For the Degree of

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

By

Yujing Wu, B.S., M.S.

Denton, Texas

May, 1994

Page 2: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

3Y=l

w a i a

no. 3T3 ;

DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF EUTECTIC AND

COMPOSITE SOLDER/COPPER JOINTS

DISSERTATION

Presented to the Graduate Council of the

University of North Texas in Partial

Fulfillment of the Requirements

For the Degree of

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

By

Yujing Wu, B.S., M.S.

Denton, Texas

May, 1994

Page 3: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Wu, Yujing, Diffusion Kinetics and Microstructures of Eutectic and

Composite Solder/Copper Joints. Doctor of Philosophy, May 1994, 294 pp.,

28 tables, 95 illustrations, bibliography, 140 titles.

Sn/Pb solders are widely used by the electronics industry to provide both

mechanical and electrical interconnections between electronic components and

printed circuit boards. Solders with enhanced mechanical properties are required

for high reliability for Surface Mount Technology (SMT) applications. One

approach to improve the mechanical properties of solder is to add metallic or

intermetallic particles to eutectic 63Sn/37Pb solder to form composite solders.

Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn form and grow at the solder/copper substrate

interface. The formation and growth of these intermetallics have been proposed

as controlling mechanisms for solderability and reliability of solder/copper joints.

The goal of this study was to investigate the diffusion kinetics and

microstructures of six types of composite solder/copper joints.

Scanning electron microscopy (SEM), transmission electron microscopy

(TEM), x-ray dispersive spectroscopy (XEDS), scanning TEM with XEDS and

in-situ TEM were used to study the microstructures and the chemical

compositions of the specimens.

The growth and morphology of the intermetallic phases at composite

solder/copper substrate interfaces were examined as functions of time,

temperature and particle additions. The anneal times range from 0 (as soldered)

to 64 days and the anneal temperatures range from 110 to 160°C. The

activation energies for the formation of Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn at the solder/copper

Page 4: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

substrate interface were determined and were compared to the values for

eutectic solder/copper system. The addition of particles to eutectic solder

strongly affects the microstructure and kinetics of the interfacial layers.

Compared to eutectic solder, the addition of Cu-containing particles increases

the activation energy for Cu6Sn5 formation and decreases the activation energy

for Cu3Sn formation. The activation energies for formation of Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn

are both decreased with Au or Ag particle additions. In Ni composite solder the

Cu3Sn formation is suppressed, and the activation energy for Cu6Sn5 formation

is dramatically increased.

The effect of the particle additions on the diffusion behavior of Sn in the

composite solder matrix and thus on the microstructures of the intermetallic

interface were examined. A Sn diffusion model and the Sn diffusion

mechanisms affected by particle additions in composite solders are proposed.

Page 5: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

LIST OF TABLES vii

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS ix

Chapter

1. INTRODUCTION 1

CHAPTER 1 REFERENCES 10

2. BASIC THEORY

2.1 Phase Diagrams 14

2.1.1 The Lead-Tin System

2.1.2 The Copper-Tin System

2.2 Surface Wetting 16

2.3 Diffusion in Solids 19

2.4 Solidification 26

2.4.1 Nucleation

2.4.2 Eutectic Solidification

2.5 Phase Growth 29

CHAPTER 2 REFERENCES ! 40

3. SAMPLE PREPARATION

3.1 Cu/Solder/Cu Joint Fabrication 42

3.2 Annealing Procedure 44

Page 6: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

3.3 SEM Sample Preparation 45

3.4 TEM Sample Preparation 47

3.4.1 Ultramicrotomy

3.4.2 Electropolishing

3.4.3 Conventional Cross-sectional (XTEM) Sample

Preparation

3.5 Thin Film Preparation 54

3.6 In-Situ Heating 56

CHAPTER 3 REFERENCES 72

4. INTERMETALLICS AT THE INTERFACES OF COMPOSITE

SOLDER/COPPER JOINTS

4.1 Introduction 74

4.2 Microstructure of Composite Solder/Copper Substrate

Interface 74

4.3 The Formation of Microvoids 80

4.4 Activation Energies of Intermetallic Formation in Eutectic

Solder and Composite Solders 81

4.5 In-Situ Thin Film Diffusion Couple Studies 84

4.6 Diffusion Mechanism 89

4.7 Microstructures of Fe and Pd Composite Solders 98

4.8 Summary and Conclusion of Chapter 4 99

CHAPTER 4 REFERENCES 164

IV

Page 7: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

5. THE MATRIX OF EUTECTIC AND COMPOSITE SOLDERS

5.1 Introduction 167

5.2 The Microstructure of Eutectic Solder 168

5.3 Eutectic Microstructures in the As-Soldered State 171

5.4 The Microstructures of Composite Solders 175

5.4.1 The Matrix of Cu-Containing Composite Solders

5.4.2 The Matrices of Au and Ag Composite Solders

5.4.3 The Matrix of the Ni Composite Solder

5.4.4 The Pb-Rich and Sn-Rich Phases in Composite

Solder

5.5 Summary and Conclusion of Chapter 5 179

CHAPTER 5 REFERENCES 203

6. SUMMARY 205

APPENDIX A. CRYSTAL STRUCTURES 211

APPENDIX A REFERENCES 231

APPENDIX B. SCANNING ELECTRON MICROSCOPY AND X-RAY

MICROANALYSIS 233

APPENDIX B REFERENCES 261

APPENDIX C. PRINCIPLES OF TRANSMISSION ELECTRON

MICROSCOPY 263

APPENDIX C REFERENCES 277

v

Page 8: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

APPENDIX D. STATISTICAL ANALYSIS 278

APPENDIX D REFERENCES 284

BIBLIOGRAPHY 285

VI

Page 9: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

LIST OF TABLES

Page

2.1 Diffusion Parameters of Cu, Ag, Au and Ni in /?-Sn and

Parameters of /?-Sn Self-diffusion 31

3.1 Compositions and Particle Size Ranges of the Composite Solders . 58

3.2 Cooling Rates of Different Sample Sets 59

3.3 Composite Solder Sample Matrix 60

3.4 XTEM Sample Preparation Procedure 61

3.5 Thin Film Sample Matrix 62

4.1 Statistical Parameters for the Thickness Measurements 101

4.2 Intermetallic Thickness (jum) and Diffusion Coefficients for

Eutectic Solder 102

4.3 Intermetallic Thickness (/xm) and Diffusion Coefficients for

7.6 w t% Cu Composite Solder Diffusion Coefficients 103

4.4 Intermetallic Thickness (/*m) and Diffusion Coefficients for

20 wt% Cu3Sn Composite Solder 104

4.5 Intermetallic Thickness (/xm) and Diffusion Coefficients for

20 w t% Cu6Sn5 Composite Solder 105

4.6 Intermetallic Thickness (/xm) and Diffusion Coefficients for

4 wt% Ag Composite Solder 106

4.7 Intermetallic Thickness (/im) and Diffusion Coefficients for

4 wt% Au Composite Solder 107

vii

Page 10: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

4.8 Intermetallic Thickness (j«m) and Diffusion Coefficients for

4 wt% Ni Composite Solder 108

4.9 Activation Energies for Intermetallic Formation for the Eutectic

Solder and Composite Solders 109

4.10 The Ratio of the Area Contacted by the Pb-rich Phase to the

Total Interfacial Area of the Solder/Cu Interface 110

4.11 Thickness (jum) of Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn at the Solder/Cu Interface

for the 10 wt% and 20 wt% Cu6Sn5 Composite Solder 111

5.1 Thickness (jam) of Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn Layers at the Solder/Copper

Particle and Solder/Copper Substrate Interface 182

5.2 Thickness (^m) of Cu6Sn5 Layers After Annealing at 140 °C . . . 183

A.1 Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of Pb 217

A.2 Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of Sn 218

A.3 Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of Cu, Ag, Au, and Ni . . . . 219

A.4 Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of Cu6Sn5 220

A.5 Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of Cu3Sn 221

A.6 Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of AuSn4 222

A.7 Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of Ag3Sn 223

A.8 Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of Ni3Sn4 224

C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope

Performance Specifications 271

VIII

Page 11: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Page

1.1 Cross-Section View of Solder/Copper Joint 9

2.1 Lead-Tin Phase Diagram 32

2.2 Copper-Tin Phase Diagram 33

2.3 The Equilibrium Shape of a Droplet 34

2.4 Schematic Illustration of Elementary Jump of Interstitial

Mechanism 35

2.5 Schematic Illustration of Elementary Jump of Vacancy

Mechanism 36

2.6 Schematic Illustration of the Free Energy and Configurations

of a Jump of Vacancy Mechanism 37

2.7 Schematic Illustration of the Free Energy Change Associated

with Nucleation of a Sphere 38

2.8 Schematic Illustration of Various Eutectic Structures 39

3.1 Sample Configuration of Copper/Solder/Copper Joint and

Silicon Blocks 63

3.2 Buehler Minimet Polisher/Grinder with Sample Holder 64

3.3 A Typical Ultramicrotome 65

3.4 Schematic of Sample Sectioning Using Ultramicrotomy 66

3.5 Schematic of Sample Rough Trimming and Re-embedding 67

3.6 Schematic of Precise Trimming of Embedded 68

3.7 South Bay Technology Model 550C Jet Polisher 69

IX

Page 12: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

3.8 VE-400 Evaporator 70

3.9 Schematics of Thin Film Sample Configurations 71

4.1 SEM Microstructure and XEDS Spectra of Eutectic Solder/Copper

Substrate Sample after Annealing at 120 °C for 32 Days 112

4.2 SEM Microstructures of Cu Composite Solder/Copper Substrate

Sample as a Function of Annealing Time 115

4.3 SEM Microstructures of Ag Composite Solder/Copper Substrate

Samples as a Function of Annealing Temperature 117

4.4 SEM Microstructures of the Eutectic Solder and Composite

Solder/Copper Substrate Interfaces after Annealing at 140°C

for 16 Days 119

4.5 TEM Micrograph of a Eutectic Solder/Copper Joint after

Annealing at 140 °C for 4 Days 123

4.6 Selected Area Diffraction Patterns of Cu6Sn5, Cu3Sn and Cu

Phases in Figure 4.5 124

4.7 SEM and TEM Micrographs of the Interfacial Area of the

As-Soldered Cu6Sn5 Composite Solder/Copper Joint 125

4.8 TEM Micrograph of the As-Soldered Cu3Sn Composite

Solder/Copper Joint 126

4.9 TEM Micrograph of the As-Soldered Cu6Sn5 Composite

Solder/Copper Joint 128

4.10 TEM Micrograph of the As-Soldered Cu Composite

Solder/Copper Joint 130

x

Page 13: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

4.11 TEM Micrograph of the As-Soldered Ag Composite

Solder/Copper Joint 131

4.12 TEM Micrograph of the As-Soldered Au Composite

Solder/Copper Joint 132

4.13 TEM Micrograph of the As-Soldered Ni Composite

Solder/Copper Joint 133

4.14 TEM Micrograph of Cu Composite Solder/Copper Joint after

Annealing at 140 °C for 4 Days 134

4.15 TEM Micrograph of Cu3Sn Composite Solder/Copper Joint after

Annealing at 140 °C for 4 Days 135

4.16 TEM Micrograph of Ag Composite Solder/Copper Joint after

Annealing at 140 °C for 4 Days 136

4.17 TEM Micrograph of Ni Composite Solder/Copper Joint after

Annealing at 140 °C for 8 Days 137

4.18 SEM Micrograph of Au Composite Solder/Copper Joint after

Annealing at 120 °C for 64 Days 138

4.19 SEM Micrograph of Ni Composite Solder/Copper Joint 140

4.20 Intermetallic Thicknesses at the Solder/Copper Substrate

Interface versus the Square Root of Annealing Time for

Eutectic Solder at 140 °C 141

4.21 Intermetallic Thickness at the Solder/Copper Substrate

Interface versus the Square Root of Annealing Time

for Cu Composite Solderat 120 °C 142

XI

Page 14: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

4.22 Plots of Ln(D) versus 1/T for Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn Formation at the

Solder/Copper Substrate Interface of Cu Composite Solder . . . . 143

4.23 Plots of Ln(D) versus 1/T for Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn Formation at the

Solder/Copper Substrate Interface of Au Composite Solder . . . . 144

4.24 TEM Micrographs of Cu, Sn, Ni, Ag and Au Thin Films 145

4.25 A Time Series of TEM Micrographs of Cu/Sn Thin Film

Showing Cu-Sn Intermetallic Growth 148

4.26 TEM Micrograph of Cu/Sn/Ni Sample Showing no Intermetallic

Growth after Annealing at 250 °C for 2 Hours, Followed by

200 °C for 12 Hours 155

4.27 XEDS Peak Intensity Ratios of Ni to Sn for the Cu/Sn/Ni Sample . 1 56

4.28 Model for the Growth of the Two Interfacial Intermetallics 157

4.29 The Thicknesses of the Intermetallic Layers at the Solder/Copper

Substrate Interface for Eutectic Solder and All Composite Solders

in the As-Soldered Condition 158

4.30 The Thicknesses of the Intermetallic Layers at the Solder/Copper

Substrate Interface for Eutectic Solder and All Composite Solders

after Annealing at 140°C for 16 Days 159

4.31 TEM Micrograph of the Matrix of Au Composite Solder after

Annealing at 140°C for 4 Days 160

4.32 XEDS Peak Intensity Ratio of Sn to Au along AuSn4/AuSn4

Grain Boundaries and AuSn4/Au Phase Boundaries 161

4.33 SEM Micrograph of 4 wt% Fe Composite Solder/Copper Joint

after Annealed at 140°C for 4 Days 162

XII

Page 15: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

4.34 SEM Micrograph of 4 wt% Pd Composite Solder/Copper Joint

after Annealed at 140°C for 16 Days 163

5.1 SEM and TEM Microstructures of the Eutectic Solder Matrix in

the As-soldered State 184

5.2 Selected Area Diffraction Patterns of Pb-rich Phase and Sn-rich

Phase 186

5.3 SEM Microstructure of the Eutectic Solder Matrix After Annealing

at 140 °C for 8 days 187

5.4 The Size of the Pb-Rich Phase of Eutectic Solder as a Function of

Anneal Time at 140 °C 188

5.5 TEM Microstructure of Eutectic Solder Matrix in the As-soldered

State Showing the Amorphous Pb Oxide Phase and SADP of Pb

Oxide Phase 189

5.6 TEM Microstructure of Eutectic Solder Matrix after Solidification

with Fast Cooling Rate Showing a Highly Lamellar Structure . . . 190

5.7 TEM Microstructure of Eutectic Solder Matrix After Solidification

with Fast Cooling Rate May Showing a Colony Structure 191

5.8 Dark Field TEM Micrograph of Eutectic Solder Matrix After

Solidification with Moderate Cooling Rate 192

5.9 SEM Microstructure of Cu, Cu3Sn and Cu6Sn5 composite Solder

Matrix in the As-Soldered State 193

5.10 TEM Micrograph of Cu Composite Solder Matrix in the As-

Soldered State shows a Cu Particle and Surrounding

Intermetallics 195

XIII

Page 16: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

5.11 SEM Microstructures of Cu, Cu3Sn and Cu6Sn5 Composite

Solder Matrix after Annealing at 140 °C for 16 Days 196

5.12 TEM Micrograph of Cu6Sn5 Composite Solder Matrix in the

As-Soldered State 198

5.13 SEM Microstructure of Au Composite Solder Matrix in the

As-Soldered State and after annealing at 140 °C for 16 Days . . . 199

5.14 SEM Microstructure of Ag Composite Solder Matrix in the

As-Soldered State and after annealing at 140 °C for 16 Days . . . 200

5.15 SEM Microstructure of Ni Composite Solder Matrix in the

As-Soldered State and after annealing at 140 °C for 16 Days . . . 201

5.16 TEM Microstructure of Ni Composite Solder Matrix in the As-

Soldered State, showing a Ni Particle and Surrounding Ni3Sn4 . . 202

A.1 Schematic of the Principle Structures of Metals 225

A.2 Schematic of the Diffraction Camera Geometry 226

A.3 Schematic of the Unit Cell of /?-Sn 227

A.4 Schematic of the Interstitials Octahedral Voids in the cph

Structure 228

A. 5 Crystal Structure of Ordered Cu6Sn5 229

A.6 Crystal Structure of Cu3Sn 230

B.1 Schematic Drawing of the Electron and X-ray Optics of a SEM . . 246

B.2 Configuration of a Typical Self-Biased Electron Gun 247

B.3 Schematic Diagram of an Electromagnetic Lens 248

B.4 Ray Diagram Illustrating Lensing Action 249

XIV

Page 17: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

B.5 Lensing Action of the Three Lenses of a Scanning Electron

Microscope 250

B.6 Schematic Illustration of Scattering Processes 251

B.7 Monte Carlo Electron Trajectory Simulation of the

Electron-Sample Interaction in Iron 252

B.8 Detailed Single Scattering Monte Carlo Electron Trajectory

Simulation for a Copper Target 253

B.9 Variation of the Backscatter Coefficient as a Function of Atomic

Number 254

B.10 Schematic Illustration of the Origin of the X-ray Continuum . . . . 255

B.11 Schematic Illustration of the Processes of Inner-Shell Ionization

and Subsequent Deexcitation 256

B.12 Schematic Illustration of Scanning System of the Scanning

Electron Microscope 257

B.13 The Principle of Information Display by Image Scanning 258

B.14 The Principle of Intensity or Z Modulation Used to Display the

Magnitude of the Signal Produced by Electron-Specimen

Interaction at the Locations Scanned in Figure B.13 259

B.15 Schematic Representation of an X-Ray Energy-Dispersive

Spectrometer 260

C.1 The Basic Structure of the Transmission Electron Microscope . . . 272

C.2 Formation of Image and Diffraction Pattern by the Objective Lens 273

C.3 Bright Field and Dark Field Image Formation 274

xv

Page 18: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

C.4 (a) Reflection at Bragg Angle 6 from Crystal Planes

(b) Relationship between Incident, Transmitted and Diffracted

Beams 275

C.5 JEOL JEM-200 Internal Structure 276

XVI

Page 19: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

Soldering is a simple operation. It consists of the relative positioning of

the parts to be jointed, wetting the surfaces with molten solder, and allowing

the solder to cool down until it has solidified. Soldering is an important

technique in the assembly of electronic products. In the electronics industry,

63Sn/37Pb eutectic solder is widely used as a joining material. It acts as both

electrical and mechanical connection within and among the different packaging

levels in an electronic assembly. The advances in packaging technologies driven

by the desire for miniaturization and increased circuit speed have resulted in

severe operating conditions for the solder joints and inevitably to solder joint

reliability problems.1 An understanding of the physical metallurgy of solders and

soldering is therefore of great interest, both from a fundamental scientific

perspective and because of its technological importance.

The reliability of the solder joints is associated with the wettability of the

surfaces to be joined and the joint's subsequent ability to retain good

performance.2 Understanding the reactions that occur during soldering and

subsequent aging must come from a fundamental knowledge of the

microstructures, thermodynamics and kinetics of the solder-substrate system.

When two metal parts are joined by solder, a metallic continuity is

established at the two interfaces that form where the solder is bonded to both

1

Page 20: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

2

metal parts.3 This metallic continuity, or joining interface, contains an

intermetallic layer or layers. An intermetallic compound is a distinguishable

homogeneous phase having a relatively narrow range of composition with

simple stoichiometric proportions.4 In most cases, the formation of an

intermetallic compound, by the reaction of the solder with the substrate, occurs

during the wetting process. Intermetallic compounds grow at the interface of

the solder and the substrate during long term storage at ambient temperature

and more rapidly at high temperatures.5,6 The manner by which a solder joint

ages is an important aspect of its reliability. If the intermetallic phases that form

are excessively brittle, the joint may not be able to withstand normal operating

strains. If the intermetallic layer grows too quickly, the solder joint may become

depleted of the elemental constituent used to form the intermetallics and

thereby change the properties of the joint. The interdiffusion processes which

produce the intermetallic layer can also produce Kirkendall porosity which can

degrade the mechanical properties of the joint. Therefore, solder-substrate

reactions are critical parts of solder joint behavior.

Cu-Sn intermetallics are the most common intermetallic layers observed

between solder and substrate because of the frequency with which Sn/Pb

solder is used with copper substrates. There are two intermetallic phases which

occur in this system. As illustrated in Figure 1.1, the layer that forms adjacent

to the copper substrate is Cu3Sn, and the layer that forms adjacent to the

solder is Cu6Sn5.4,7,8,9

The effects of intermetallic growth within solder joints are not entirely

understood. While the presence of intermetallic compounds are an indication

that a good metallurgical bond has formed, the fact that these compounds are

Page 21: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

3

brittle may also make them deleterious to a joint's mechanical integrity. When

these compounds form as continuous layers at the solder/substrate interface,

the intermetallic can interrupt electrical currents due to their high resistivity,

effectively isolating the metals that were to be electrically joined.10 In addition,

if these intermetallic compounds become too thick, the reliability of the joint

can be in jeopardy due to cracking, which may begin in these compounds.5

Because of the important contribution that the intermetallics make to the

stability of the solder connection, understanding their formation and growth is

important. Solder/substrate reactions fall into two categories: molten

solder/substrate reactions and solid state growth of intermetallic compounds.2

During wetting, molten solder comes into contact and reacts with the solid

substrate. At this point, two processes occur simultaneously: the base metal

dissolves into the molten solder, and the active constituent in the solder reacts

with the base metal. Both processes will form intermetallic compounds in the

interfacial region between the molten solder and the base metal. Many studies

have been published that examine the reactions between the molten solder and

the substrate.2,11,12,13,14 The solid state growth of intermetallic compounds is

generally more complex and includes the problem of long term growth of

intermetallic layers at the interface during the service life of the connection.

Two types of solid state growth kinetics may be observed: linear and parabolic.

One interpretation is that linear growth is limited by the reaction rate at the

growth site, i.e., it is reaction controlled, and parabolic growth is limited by

diffusion of reactant to the reaction interface, i.e., it is diffusion controlled.2

The microstructure and kinetics of intermetallic growth in the Sn/Pb

solder/substrate system have been widely studied. For copper in contact with

Page 22: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

4

Sn and either 60Sn/40Pb or 63Sn/37Pb solder, the two intermetallic phases

previously described are generally observed as a result of long-term aging:

Cu6Sn5 adjacent to the solder, followed by Cu3Sn adjacent to the copper

substrate. Cu6Sn5 is always observed in optical metallographic cross sections

of as-soldered samples, whereas the Cu3Sn is not. It is thermodynamically

predicted that both intermetallics are present in the as-soldered state.

Numerous investigations15'16,17'18,19'20'21'22'23'24'25'26 have generated data on the

solid state growth of the Cu-Sn intermetallics at temperatures less than the

melting point of eutectic Sn/Pb solder (183°C). In most of these studies, the

total intermetallic layer thickness is reported as a function of time at

temperature, as opposed to measurements of the discrete thicknesses of the

two Cu-Sn intermetallic phases. There are a few references where individual

measurements have been performed,19,21 however, the data in these references

usually only covers either isolated temperatures or relatively short ranges in

time and aging temperature. The most comprehensive investigations of

intermetallic growth kinetics for samples of tin/copper and 60Sn/40Pb

solder/copper were conducted during the early 70s by MacKay and coworkers

at the International Tin Research Institute (ITRI).15,18 The majority of the ITRI

data were generated on specimens consisting of electroplated layers of either

Sn or 60Sn/40Pb on annealed wrought copper substrates, followed by aging

treatments in air furnaces at temperatures between 70°C and 170°C for times

as long as 1 year. A least squares analysis was performed27 on the ITRI data.

The results show that a parabolic growth law is an appropriate description of

the intermetallic growth process for both intermetallic layers.

The literature is in general agreement on several findings: the solid state

Page 23: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

5

growth kinetics of Cu3Sn and Cu6Sn5 for Sn-based solder alloys in contact with

copper can be described by parabolic growth laws. The activation energy for

the growth of Cu3Sn is about twice that of Cu6Sn5, and the Cu3Sn layer is

always thinner than the Cu6Sn5 layer over the temperature range of 90° to

170°C. The relatively thick intermetallic layers are associated with mechanically

weak connections. Some conclusions, however, remain in dispute: does the

Cu3Sn form during soldering or later during aging; is the dominant diffusing

species Cu or Sn; and what are the morphologies of the intermetallic phases?

Surface mount technology (SMT) has been widely adopted in recent

years by the electronics industry, brought on by the need to produce small,

dense electronic packages. The solder joint in SMT is responsible for both

electrical and mechanical connection. Sn/Pb solder does not have adequate

ductility to sustain the repeated relative component displacements caused by

the mismatch between the expansion coefficients of the chip carrier and the

circuit board.28 Solders with enhanced mechanical properties are required for

high reliability.29 One approach is to add metallic or intermetallic particles to

eutectic 63Sn/37Pb solder to form composite solders.30,31 If the added particles

have a higher melting point than the solder matrix, the composite will melt at

the same temperature as the matrix. If the added particles have superior

mechanical properties compared to the matrix, the composite solder is expected

to be stronger than the matrix solder alone. Hence, SMT solder joints made

with composite solder should be stronger and more reliable than SMT joints

made using standard solder. Initial studies of these materials have shown that

this is indeed the case.32 Although kinetic and microstructural data for the new

composite solder/substrate systems are needed, only a few studies have been

Page 24: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

6

conducted to date.33,34,35

The main purpose of this work is to explore the kinetics and

microstructures of eutectic solder and six types of composite solder used with

copper substrates. The six types of composite solder contain 7.6 w t% Cu, 20

w t% Cu3Sn, 20 wt% Cu6Sn5, 4 wt% Au, 4 wt% Ag, and 4 w t% Ni.

In Chapter 2, the basic theories of solid state phase transformations are

discussed. The phase diagram summarizes the temperature and composition

range in which the various phases are stable in an alloy, and gives a systematic

description of the melting and solidification behavior.36 Wetting, in which

specific interactions take place between the liquid solder and solid surface of

the part to be soldered, is an essential prerequisite for soldering. It depends on

the surface tensions acting between the interfaces involved. During soldering,

the solder transforms from a liquid to a solid. Solidification occurs by the

nucleation and growth of new phases and involves a complete structural

change at the advancing liquid-solid interface. The microstructure of the solder

matrix in the as-soldered state depends on the solidification cooling rate.37

During annealing, the intermetallic layers at the solder/copper substrate

interface grow thicker. The diffusion of Sn through the solder matrix and the

intermetallic phases, followed by reaction with Cu must occur for intermetallic

growth to take place. The particles added to the eutectic solder matrix affect

the diffusion behavior of the Sn, and thus affect the formation and growth of

the intermetallic layers at the composite solder/copper interface.

Scanning electron microscopy (SEM), transmission electron microscopy

(TEM), X-ray energy dispersive spectroscopy (XEDS) and scanning transmission

electron microscopy (STEM) are the major characterization techniques used to

Page 25: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

7

analyze the microstructures of the solder/copper joints. The sample preparation

details for formation of the copper/solder/copper joints, SEM samples, TEM

samples, and thin film samples are presented in Chapter 3. Ultramicrotomy was

the primary method for TEM sample preparation and is the only method that

allows all phases of the solder/copper joint be simultaneously analyzed by

TEM.38

In Chapter 4, the results of the studies of solid state diffusion kinetics

and microstructural evolution during intermetallic formation and growth in

copper/composite solder/copper joints are discussed. The intermetallics at the

solder/copper interface are examined as functions of time, temperature and

particle composition. The activation energies for the formation of Cu6Sn5 and

Cu3Sn for the six types of composite solder/copper system are determined and

compared to the values for the eutectic solder/copper system. A diffusion

model based on the SEM and TEM studies and in-situ TEM thin film

observations is discussed. The effects of the particle additions on the diffusion

behavior of Sn in the composite solder matrix and thus on the microstructures

of the interfacial intermetallic layers are also discussed.

The microstructures of the eutectic solder and composite solder matrix

are discussed in Chapter 5. The relationship between the microstructure of the

eutectic solder matrix in the as-soldered state and the solidification cooling rate,

and the annealing behaviors of the two phases in the matrix are examined. The

effects of the particles added to the solder matrix on matrix solder phases and

Sn diffusion are also discussed.

The crystal structures of the metals and intermetallic phases are briefly

described in Appendix A. The basic principles of scanning electron microscopy

Page 26: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

8

and transmission electron microscopy are given in Appendix B and Appendix C,

respectively. The statistical analysis methods used in this study are discussed

in Appendix D.

Page 27: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Cu Strap

63/37 Sn/Pb Solder 01 Composite Solder

Cu Strap

7ZZZZZZZZZZZZ22ZZZZ. WZZZZL

Figure 1.1. Cross-sectional view of solder/copper joint.

Page 28: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

CHAPTER 1 REFERENCES

1. J.W. Morris, D. Tribula, T.S.E. Summers and D. Grivas, Solder Joint

Reliability Theory and Application, J.H. Lau Ed., (Van Nostrand Reinhold,

New York, 1991), Chapter 7.

2. A.D. Roming, Jr., Y.A. Chang, J.J. Stephens, D.R. Frear, V. Marcotte

and C. Lea, Solder Mechanics: A State of the Art Assessment, D.R.

Frear, W.B. Jones and K.R. Kinsman Ed., (TMS, PA, 1990), Chapter 2.

3. H.H. Manko, Solder and Soldering, 2nd Ed., (McGraw-Hill, New York,

1979), Chapter 1.

4. C.S. Barrett and T.B. Massalski, Structure of Metals, 3rd Ed., (Pergamon

Press, New York, 1980), Chapter 10.

5. P.E. Davis, M.E. Warwick and P.J. Kay, Plating and Surface Finishing,

69, 72 (1982).

6. R.W. Woodgate, Handbook of Machine Soldering, (Wiley, New York,

1983), Chapter 2.

7. R.J.K. Wassink, Soldering in Electronics, 2nd Ed., (Electrochemical

Publications, Scotland, 1989), Chapter 4.

8. P.E. Davis, M.E. Warwick and S.J. Muckett, Plating and Surface

Finishing, 70, 49 (1983).

9. M.E. Warwick and S.J. Muckett, Circuit World, 9, 5 (1983).

10. E.W. Brothers, The Western Electric Engineer, 49 (1981).

11. I. Okamoto and T. Yasuda, Trans. JWRI, 15, 73 (1986).

10

Page 29: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

11

12. Z.P. Saperstein and M.A. Howes, Welding Journal, 47, 162s (1968).

13. M.A. Howes and Z.P. Saperstein, Welding Journal, 48, 80s (1969).

14. W.G. Bader, Welding Journal, 48, 551s (1969).

15. P.J. Kay and C.A. MacKay, Trans. Inst. Metal Finishing, 51, 85 (1973).

16. L. Zakraysek, Welding Journal, 51, 536s (1972).

17. M. Onishi and H. Fujibuchi, Trans. Japanese Inst. Metals, 16, 539

(1975).

18. D.A. Unsworth and C.A. MacKay, Trans. Inst. Metal Finishing, 51, 85

(1973).

19. K. Kumar, A. Moscaritolo and M. Brownwell, J. Electrochemical

Society, 128, 2165 (1981).

20. V.C. Marcotte and K. Schroder, Mater. Res. Soc. Symp. Proc. 19, 403

(1983).

21. D.S. Dunn, T.F. Marinis, W.M. Sherry and C.J. Williams, Electronic

Packaging Materials Science, E.A. Geiss, K.N. Tu and D.R. Uhlman,

Eds., (MRS, Pittsburgy, 1985), p 129.

22. E.K. Ohriner, Welding Journal, 66, 191s (1987).

23. Q. Yiyu, F. Hongyuan, C. Dinghua, F. Fuhua and H. Lixia, Brazing and

Soldering, 13, 39 (1987).

24. A.J. Sunwoo, J.W. Morris, Jr. and G.K. Lucey, Jr., Metallurgical

Transactions A, 23A, 1323 (1992).

25. J.A. Clum and T.J. Singler, Proc. 3rd Elec. Mater. Proc. Congress, 175

(1990).

Page 30: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

12

26. S.S. Tamhankar, E.K. Chang, R.J. Wolf and M.J. Kirschner, J.

Microcircuits & Electronic Packaging, 16, 23 (1993).

27. J.J. Stephens, Internal Memorandum, March 2, 1989, Sandia National

Laboratories, Albuquerque, NM.

28. T.J. Kilinski, J.R. Lesniak and B.I. Sandor, Solder Joint Reliability, J.H.

Lau Eds., (Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 1991), Chapter 13.

29. K.R. Kinsman, Solder Mechanics: A State of the Art Assessment, D.R.

Frear, W.B. Jones and K.R. Kinsman, Eds., (TMS, PA, 1991), p. XIX.

30. D.R. Frear, D. Grivas and J.W. Morris, Jr., J. Electr. Mat., 16, 181

(1987).

31. J.L. Marshall, J. Calderon, J.A. Sees, G. Lucey and J.S. Hwang, IEEE

Trans. CHMT, 14, 698 (1991).

32. S.M.L. Sastry, T.C. Peng, R.J. Lederich, K.L. Jerina and C.G. Kuo, Proc.

NEPCON West '92, III, 1266 (1992).

33. R.F. Pinizzotto, Y. Wu, E.G. Jacobs and L.A. Foster, Proc. NEPCON

West '92, III, 1284 (1992).

34. R.F. Pinizzotto, E.G. Jacobs, Y. Wu, J.A. Sees, L.A. Foster and C.

Pouraphabagher, 31 st Annual Proceedings, Reliability Physics 1993, 209

(1993).

35. Y. Wu, J.A. Sees, C. Pouraghabagher, L.A. Foster, J.L. Marshall, E.G.

Jacobs and R.F. Pinizzotto, J. Electron. Mat., 22, 769 (1993).

36. R.E. Smallman, Modern Physical Metallurgy, 4th Ed., (Butterworths,

London, 1985), Chapter 3.

Page 31: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

13

37. J.W. Morris, Jr., D. Tribula, T.S.E. Summers and D. Grivas, Solder Joint

Reliability, J.H. Lau Ed., (Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 1991),

Chapter 7.

38. E.G. Jacobs, L.A. Foster, Y. Wu, A.R. Wilson and R.F. Pinizzotto, J.

Mater. Res., 8, 87 (1993).

Page 32: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

CHAPTER 2

BASIC THEORY

2.1 Phase Diagrams

In any alloy at equilibrium, the free energy of the alloy system will be a

minimum. In principle, equations for the free energy of the various phases as

a function of composition and temperature can be calculated and used to

determine the phases present at equilibrium, and the composition of these

phases. In fact, the available theory is not precise enough for such refined

calculations in even the simplest case. As a result, the phases which form at

various temperatures and compositions are determined empirically and recorded

in the form of a phase diagram. A phase diagram summarizes the temperature

and composition range in which the various phases are stable and gives a

systematic description of the melting and solidification behavior of an alloy.1

Depending on the nature of the two metals involved (i.e. the crystal

structure, the size of the atoms, the valency, etc.), several basic types of

binary equilibrium diagrams exist. The binary phase diagrams have been

discussed in details in many books.1,2 Here only the Pb-Sn and Cu-Sn systems

which are the systems interested in this study will be discussed.

2.1.1 The Lead-Tin System

Figure 2.1 is the Lead-Tin phase diagram,3 a typical eutectic phase

diagram. In this diagram the temperature is plotted along the vertical axis and

14

Page 33: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

15

the composition along the horizontal axis. The compositions are specified in

both atomic and mass percentage.

Point P in Figure 2.1 represents the melting point of pure lead; point S

is the melting point of pure tin. Point E is the melting point of the alloy with

eutectic composition, tin62-lead38. This point is called the eutectic point and

is at 183°C. Sometimes tin63-lead37 is specified as the eutectic composition,

especially in the catalogues of solder manufacturers.

Above the liquidus in the diagram, only liquid exists. Below the solidus,

exclusively solid exists. In the intermediate range, solid and liquid exist

together. If, for instance, the high lead-bearing alloy, Iead65-tin35, cools down

from the liquid state, then at approximately 245°C (point A), segregation of

lead-rich crystals commences. These lead-rich crystals are not 100% lead, but

have a composition corresponding to point B in the diagram. As a result, the

composition of the liquid shifts to the tin-rich side, and its solidification

temperature is lowered. Upon continued cooling, this shift continues,

accompanied by continuing segregation of lead-rich crystals. In this process the

composition of the liquid moves along the line A-E, and that of the lead moves

along the line B-D, that is, on continued cooling the lead-rich crystals absorb

more tin. When the liquid reaches the composition of point E at a temperature

of 183°C, it is in equilibrium not only with the lead-rich crystals of composition

D, but also with tin-rich crystals of composition G. The composition of the

liquid now ceases to shift, whereas crystallization continues at constant

temperature and composition: the eutectic temperature and the eutectic

composition. Thus the solidification process of Iead65-tin35 solder stretches

over a range of temperatures.

Page 34: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

16

A solder of eutectic composition does not have a solidification

temperature range, but has a single solidifying or melting point. Other elements

may be added to the solder. With low contents of these other elements, their

influence remains insignificant and is usually neglected. However, the precise

positions of the characteristic points in the phase diagram are then uncertain.

2.1.2 The Copper-Tin System

The Copper-Tin phase diagram,3 shown in Figure 2.2, like most other

alloy systems, contains more than one of the characteristic reactions. Cu-Sn

phase diagram contains several secondary solid solutions, i.e. phases which

occur in the middle of the diagram with a fairly wide range of compositions.

There are several phases which become unstable with cooling. For example, the

6 phase decomposes by a eutectoid change into a + e near 350°C. e and rj are

the only intermetallic phases that can form and exist at temperatures below

350°C. There is a A7-phase order-disorder transformation which occurs at

227°C. Above 227°C, the rj-phase exists as a disordered solid solution, but at

low temperatures the r/'-phase has a structure that is a supperlattice on the

NiAs (B82) type structure.4

2.2 Surface Wetting

Wetting is an essential prerequisite for soldering. Wetting means that a

specific interaction takes place between the liquid solder and the solid surface

of the part to be soldered. The extent to which a liquid solder will spread across

a surface, or flow into a gap between two or more surfaces, depends, among

other things, on the surface tensions acting between the interfaces involved.5

Page 35: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

17

The surface tension is determined by the interatomic bond energies of

the atoms. In the bulk of a liquid metal, each atom has a certain number of

nearest neighbors, and the total internal energy may be considered as a

summation of these interatomic bond energies. The atoms in the surface layer

possess a higher potential energy than the bulk atoms, because they are

incompletely surrounded by the other atoms. If the surface area is enlarged,

more atoms take up positions on the surface at the expense of increasing their

energy. At the interface of two metals, the atoms have two types of bonds:

bonds with atoms of their own kind and bonds with atoms of the other metal.

It depends on the various metal-metal bond energies whether these interfacial

atoms have a higher or lower energy than the bulk atoms. The higher the

energy of these atoms at the interface, the higher the interfacial tension.6

The surface tension of a liquid, y„ is a thermodynamic quantity, and is

equal to the amount of work needed to isothermally enlarge the liquid surface

area. A system strives toward a minimum value of its free energy, and hence

to a minimum surface area. A floating droplet therefore assumes the shape of

a sphere, because this shape has the minimum surface area at a given volume.

This tendency to reduce the surface area implies that there exists a pressure

difference, AP, between the two sides of a spherical surface:5

A P = - t ± (2.1) R

The surface tension, y„ is not a function of R, the sphere radius, as long as R

is much greater than the interatomic distance.

Figure 2.3a shows the situation of a liquid-solder droplet on a solid

Page 36: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

18

surface.5 When gravity is negligible, which is the case with small droplets, the

shape of the droplet is determined solely by surface tensions. The pressure is

the same everywhere in the liquid, the curvature is constant along the liquid

surface, and the shape is therefore that of a spherical cap.

The droplet selects the shape for which the total surface free energy,

Fsurface

Fsurface = ysxAs + yisxAi + yixAl ( 2 " 2 )

has its minimum value, where: 7, - surface tension of the liquid, ys - surface

tension of the solid, yls - surface tension of the liquid-solid interface, As - solid

surface area, At - interfacial area, and A[ - liquid spherical area. From this

condition Eq. 2.3 can be obtained:5

Y is + Y / C O S 0 = y s ( 2 . 3 )

The shape of Figure 2.3a is the result of a calculation in which it was

assumed that gravity could be ignored and that the solid surface is flat.7 In

practice, the solid material will dissolve in the molten solder and the final

equilibrium shape will always tend towards that of Figure 2.3b, since this has

a lower total surface free energy.5

From Eq. 2.3 it is clear that wetting , i.e., a small contact angle Q, is

promoted by small values of 7, and 7ls in combination with a relatively large

value of 7S. The surface tension of oxides are distinctly lower than the values

for the corresponding metals.8 Therefore, it is difficult to wet the surface of a

solid metal as long as it is oxidized. The reaction of a flux with the oxide on a

solid surface causes an increase of the surface tension ys by removal of the

Page 37: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

19

oxide, and thus promotes wetting of the metal surface by the solder.

2.3 Diffusion in Solids

Diffusion is a process in which atoms move from one region to another

due to a driving force to lower the free energy of the system. If there is a

chemical potential gradient in the system, atoms will tend to move from a

region of high chemical potential to a region of low chemical potential. In most

cases, the chemical potential gradient is in the same direction as the

concentration gradient of the diffusing species.9 Therefore, it is convenient to

describe a diffusion process in terms of the concentration gradient.

Consider a one-dimensional system. If the atomic concentration is C(x),

the flux of the diffusing atoms can be expressed as10

J - D 0 , i 2 A )

Where J is the net flux of atoms, D is the diffusion coefficient with units of

cm2/sec, and 8C/dx is the concentration gradient, assumed to be constant over

time. Equation 2.4 is called Fick's first law. It shows that the number of atoms

passing through a plane of unit area per unit time is simply proportional to the

concentration gradient.

When atoms diffuse from one area to another area inside a solid, the

concentration C(x) usually varies with time. The continuity equation of the atom

flow then leads to10

Page 38: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

20

dC(x,t) _ (PC (2.5) dt ax2

Equation 2.5 is called Fick's second law, whore C, the concentration, is a

function of time t and position x.

Consider a system, its scale is much larger than the mean diffusion

distance of the atoms with a fixed concentration Cs at the surface of the

specimen. As given by P.G. Shewmon10, by assuming that the diffusion

coefficient D is a constant, the solution to the diffusion equations give the

relationship between the depth of the diffusion-affected zone, d, and the

diffusion time:

d'y/Di ( 2 6 )

A detailed derivation and discussion of this relation was also given by J.R.

Manning.11 Equation 2.6 gives a quantitative measurement of diffusion and thus

is of practical importance. It is the form that will be used throughout this

dissertation.

During diffusion, atoms move from one region in a solid to another.

Microscopically, during diffusion the atoms jump from site to site in a random

fashion, known as random walk.11,12 In the presence of a concentration

gradient, more atoms are moving away from the high-concentration region due

to random walk than are moving away from the low-concentration region.

Diffusion through various mechanisms including (1) interstitial mechanism, (2)

interstitialcy mechanism, (3) crowdion mechanism, (4) vacancy mechanism, (5)

dislocation pipe diffusion mechanisms, (6) grain boundary diffusion

mechanisms, (7) surface diffusion mechanisms, and so on.11 The first four

Page 39: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

21

mechanisms listed above are possible means of volume or bulk diffusion. Of

these, the vacancy and the interstitial mechanisms are most frequently

encountered. Atoms diffusing in different chemical systems may have different

diffusion mechanisms, and in a single diffusion process, several mechanisms

may operate simultaneously. The elementary atomic motions in a crystal for

interstitial and vacancy mechanisms are shown in Figures 2.4 and 2.5.

Interstitial Mechanism: When there are imperfections such as interstitial

atoms, the interstitial mechanism can operate. Here, an atom moves through

the crystal by moving directly from one interstitial site to another, as shown in

Figure 2.4.11 This mechanism is particularly likely for diffusion of small impurity

atoms which easily fit into interstitial sites and do not greatly displace the

solvent atoms from their normal lattice sites.

Vacancy Mechanism: In thermal equilibrium, any crystal at a temperature

above absolute zero contains a certain number of vacant lattice sites. These

vacancies provide an easy path for diffusion. The elementary jump in the

vacancy mechanism is the jump of an atom into a neighboring vacancy, as

shown in Figure 2.5.11 The site previously occupied by the atom is the vacant,

so that in effect the atom and vacancy merely exchange positions. Each atom

moves through the crystal by making a series of exchanges with the various

vacancies which from time to time are in its vicinity.

Consider a randomly diffusing entity. If the jump frequency of the particle

is independent of jump direction, we have10

Page 40: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

22

D = -Ya2 (2.7) 6

where T is the jump frequency, and a is the interatomic distance of two atomic

planes.

Consider the diffusion of vacancies. As seen in Figure 2.6, a vacancy

moves whenever one of the atoms next to it jumps into the vacant site. These

neighboring atoms oscillate about their equilibrium site, in the direction of the

vacancy, with a frequency v. After some time, one of the atoms will make an

especially severe oscillation at about the time the four-atom window separating

it from the vacancy opens up. The magnitude of the local free-energy

fluctuation required for such a jump is called AGm. AGm is much greater than

the mean thermal energy of the atoms, RT. The frequency with which such a

large fluctuation occurs depends on the ratio AGm /RT, the ratio of the required

energy fluctuation to the mean thermal energy of the atoms. A statistical

mechanical treatment13 of the problem indicates that the fraction of the

oscillations which lead to a jump is exp( -AGm/RT), where AGm is made up of

a relatively large activation enthalpy, AHm, and a smaller TASm term.

The mean vibrational frequency v is essentially temperature independent,

though the vibrational amplitude increases with T. As a result, the expression

vexp(- AGm/RT) gives the jump frequency for each of the atoms neighboring a

vacancy. If the vacancy has z nearest neighbors, then r „ for the vacancy is

r ^ v e x p ^ - (2.8) RT

So D„ is given by

Page 41: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

23

Ya2 a2 A5m A/ / f A Q »

Z)v=——— = ——zv exp—-exp - (2.9) v 6 6 R RT

where the equation AGm = AHm -TASm is used. Let

D0 = — v e x p - ^ 5 - (2-10) 6 R

So

D=D0exp—2- (2.11) 0 RT

is obtained, where D0 is called a pre-exponential constant, and Q the activation

energy. Though Equation 2.11 was derived using a vacancy mechanism, it is

empirically correct for other diffusion mechanisms. In a solid, Q has values

between 0.1 and 5.0 eV, depending on the system and the diffusion

mechanism. Generally, Q is smaller for an interstitial diffusion mechanism than

for a vacancy diffusion mechanism. The values for D0 are generally in the

vicinity of unity, although they can be rather small for interstitial diffusion.

The noble metals (copper, silver, gold, and nickel) have been found to

diffuse extremely rapidly in a polyvalent metal matrix, such as lead, tin, indium,

or thallium. The diffusivity of these dilute impurities is from 102 to 105 times

that of self-diffusion. The values of the activation energies and D0 value for

Cu,14 Ag,15 Au,15 and Ni16 diffusion in /?-Sn and for Sn self-diffusion,17 along the

a and c axes of Sn, are listed in Table 2.1.

The very low activation energies for Cu, Ag, Au and Ni diffusion in Sn,

make a striking contrast with the activation energies for Sn self-diffusion. An

examination of the geometrical configuration in /?-Sn (discussed in Appendix A)

Page 42: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

24

reveals that the atoms in the /?-Sn structure form a set of relatively open square

channels along the c axis, while passages transverse to the c axis are more

restricted.14,15 An interstitial mechanism is usually invoked to explain the high

mobility of the fast diffusers. Interstitial solid solutions are thought to occur

only when the ratio of the solute atomic diameter/solvent atomic diameter is in

the range 0.4-0.6,18 whereas in these systems this ratio is in the range 0.7-0.8.

However, Dyson, Anthony and Turnbull19 have pointed out that it may be

possible to account for the tendency toward interstitial formation in the fast-

diffuser systems if the packing or the host metal is limited by ionic rather than

by atomic size. For example, the radius of channels along the c axis of Sn

bounded by the Pauling ion cores of Sn would be 2.20 A for quadruply ionized

Sn. Therefore it appears that noble-metal and Ni atoms (atomic radii:20 Cu,

1.278 A; Ag, 1.445 A; Au, 1.442 A; Ni, 1.246 A) could be placed in the

channels along the c axis of Sn with little or no distortion. Here the Ni atomic

size (1.246 A) is the smallest, compared with other elements, and its diffusivity

is the largest of all the impurities in tin.

It is found experimentally that diffusion along grain boundaries can also

be described by

D „ ' D w e x (2.12)

where Db is the grain boundary diffusivity and Db0 is the frequency factors. Qb

is the experimentally determined values of the activation energies for diffusion.

In general, at any temperature, the magnitudes of Db relative to the diffusivity

through defect-free lattice D, are

Page 43: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

25

Db>D{ (2.13)

This mainly reflects the relative ease with which atoms can migrate along

interior boundaries and through the lattice. Rapid diffusion along the grain

boundaries increases the mean concentration in a thin volume around the

boundary and thereby produces an increase in the apparent diffusivity in the

material as a whole. If the grain boundary has an effective thickness 6 and the

grain size is d, the apparent diffusion coefficient in this case, as given by D.A.

Porter et al.2 will be

D ^ D . + D f i l d (2.14)

It can be seen that the relative importance of lattice and grain boundary

diffusion depends on the ratio Db<5/D,d. When Dbtf > D,d, diffusion through the

lattice can be ignored in comparison to grain boundary diffusion and grain

boundary diffusion makes a significant contribution. The effective width of a

grain boundary is ~0 .5 nm. The order of grain sizes can vary from ~ 1 to 10

jam in our composite solder/copper systems and the effectiveness of the grain

boundaries will vary accordingly.

The relative magnitudes of Db<5 and D,d are sensitive to temperature.

Although Db > D, at all temperatures, the difference increases as temperature

decreases. This is because the activation energy for diffusion along grain

boundaries (Qb) is lower than that for lattice diffusion (Q,). In fee metals it is

generally found that Qb ~ 0.5 Q,. This means that when the grain boundary

diffusivity is scaled by the factor 616 (Eq. 2.14) the grain boundary contribution

to the total, or apparent, diffusion coefficient is negligible in comparison to the

Page 44: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

26

lattice diffusivity at high temperature, but dominates at low temperature. In

general it is found that grain boundary diffusion becomes important below

about 0.75-0.8 Tm, where, Tm is the equilibrium melting temperature in degrees

Kelvin.2

The rate at which atoms diffuse along different boundaries is not the

same, but depends on the atomic structure of the individual boundary. This in

turn depends on the orientation of the adjoining crystals and the plane of the

boundary. Also the diffusion coefficient can vary with direction within a given

boundary plane. In the composite solder/copper system, there are Sn-rich and

Pb-rich phases, and metallic or intermetallic particles in the solder matrix. The

metallic and intermetallic phases have much higher melting temperatures than

eutectic solder. The diffusion of the Sn or Pb through these phases may be

dominated by grain boundary diffusion in the temperature range used in the

work reported here, which is below the melting temperature of eutectic solder

(183°C).

2.4 Solidification

Solidification is the term used to describe the transformation from the

liquid to the solid state. Solidification is a process that occurs by the nucleation

and growth of a new phase; that is, the structure changes suddenly and

completely at the advancing liquid-solid interface.10

2.4.1 Nucleation

In solidification, nucleation involves the ordering of a group of atoms in

the liquid to form a very small crystal of the solid. Such fluctuations occur

Page 45: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

27

abdve the melting point, but at these temperatures the liquid is more stable

than solid so the crystallites or nuclei always decompose back to liquid. Even

when the temperature of the liquid is lowered to just under the melting point,

the nuclei formed still tend to decompose back to liquid again. This remelting

of the crystallites stems from the surface energy associated with the liquid-solid

interface of these small nuclei.

Consider a given volume of liquid at a temperature AT below the melting

temperature Tm with a free energy G,. If some of the atoms of the liquid cluster

together to form a small solid sphere of radius r, the free energy of the system

will change to G2. A free energy change AG = G2 - GT is given by:

AG(r) = -AGV—rcr3 + YSi4n:r2 (2.15) 3

and

A G = G L - G S = ̂ - (2.16) Te

where Gs and GL are the free energies per unit volume of solid and liquid

respectively, ySL is the solid/liquid interfacial free energy, and L is the latent

heat of fusion per unit volume. A plot of AG(r) in Figure 2.72 shows that for r

< r* , a critical nucleus size, growth of the crystallite increases the free energy

of the material involved. However, if the fluctuation is great enough to form a

crystallite of r > r* , continued growth of the particle will decrease the free

energy of the system. By solving for d(AG)/dr = 0

r* = 2 Y s l (2.17)

Page 46: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

28

AG' = 1 6 " ( Y ^ 3 12.18) 3(A Gvf

is obtained. The larger the undercooling AT, the smaller the fluctuation in free

energy required to create a supercritical particle.

2.4.2 Eutectic Solidification

In the solidification of a binary eutectic composition two solid phases

form cooperatively from the liquid. The reaction L -» a + /3 is called eutectic

solidification.10

In a eutectic the two phases can have various morphologies. These are

shown in Figure 2.8.10 As discussed by P.G. Shewmon,10 the shape that

minimizes the amount of free energy going into ct-0 interface might appear to

be the globular form. However, discrete globules require repeated nucleation of

the second phase. The process proceeds with less supercooling if the second

phase grows continuously as rods or lamellae. If the surface energy of the a-/3

interface, ya/j, is independent of the orientation of the interface, rods form, since

these have a lower surface-volume ratio. However, in crystals ya/3 is rarely

independent of interface orientation, so a lamellar structure is often observed,

with the lamellae oriented to have a low ya/3.

The rod and lamellar eutectic occur in those cases where both phases

grow with an atomically rough surface, giving an interface mobility that is high

and isotropic. The liquid and solid are thus in equilibrium at each interface, so

the rate of growth is determined by the rate of diffusion in the liquid. In the

case of the acicular eutectic, the matrix phase grows with an atomically rough

Page 47: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

29

surface, but the growth of the acicular phase is determined by the rate of

incorporation of atoms into the atomically smooth crystal surface. The phase

thus grows only in certain directions, grows rather independently of the matrix,

and seems to nucleate frequently. In our eutectic solder system, both the

lamellar and globular eutectic microstructures are observed.

2.5 Phase Growth

The control of grain size by annealing arises in a variety of situations.

During high temperature (>0 .5 Tm) anneals, the smaller grains shrink and

disappear so that the mean grain diameter D of the specimen increases with

time.

Since grain growth occurs spontaneously, it must correspond to a

decrease in the free energy. In grain growth the energy and perfection of the

lattice of a region is not changed by the passage of a grain boundary through

it. Thus in grain growth the decrease in free energy comes from the decrease

in total grain-boundary area. The free energy per unit volume associated with

the grain boundaries is:

G „ ' A ^ b (2.19)

where Ab is the area of grain boundary per unit volume. The surface area per

grain is proportional to D2, while its volume is proportional to D3. Thus Gb oc

7b/D. Consider a spherical grain of radius r. If the grain diameter is increased by

the infinitesimal dr, then dn atoms are transferred across the grain boundary

from the surrounding grain. The free-energy change for this transfer can be

written2

Page 48: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

30

dG = y dA = A (j, dn (2.20)

A | a = Y — <2-21> dn

where A/* is the chemical potential drop across a grain boundary. For a sphere

the number dn of atoms is the volume divided by the atomic volume Q, so

Qdn-dV=4izr2dr (2.22)

The area change accompanying dr is -87rrdr, so

An - " 2 y Q (2.23) r

This is often called the Gibbs-Thomson equation. The difference in chemical

potential Aju, across the boundary drives the atoms across the boundary, thus

allowing the grain to grow. Eq. 2.22 tell us that free energy decreases as the

grain grows. In the case of solder matrix, with annealing, the grain sizes for the

Sn-rich and Pb-rich regions increase, as fast as the atoms can diffuse to them

from the surrounding matrix.

Page 49: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

31

Table 2.1. Diffusion Parameters of Cu, Ag, Au and Ni in /?-Sn

and Parameters of /?-Sn Self-diffusion

element atomi

c radii

o (A)

parallel c axis parallel a axis element atomi

c radii

o (A)

Q» °o||

(cm2/s)

Qi Dox

(cm2/s)

element atomi

c radii

o (A)

Kcal eV

°o||

(cm2/s) Kcal eV

Dox

(cm2/s)

Cu 1.28 ~ 4 0.17 ~ 10"3 7.9 0.34 2.4x10"3

Ag 1.45 12.3 0.53 7.1x10"3 18.4 0.80 1.8x10"1

Au 1.44 11.0 0.48 5.8x10"3 17.7 0.77 1.6x10"1

Ni 1.25 4.3 0.19 2.0x10"2 12.9 0.56 1.9x10"2

Sn 1.62 26.0 1.13 7.7x10'2 25.9 1.12 1.1x10'1

Page 50: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

32

10 20 30 40 WEIGHT PER CENT LEAO 50 60 70 80 85 90 95

327J

232* A B/ 232*

\G 183* CD (Pb) /1.45(2.! hs*i

>t 26.1 (3« L11 7 <8

s \ s \

96.81 98.1)4 I I

0 S*

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 ATOMIC PER CENT IEAO

80 90 100 Pfc

Figure 2.1. Lead-Tin phase diagram, showing the eutectic temperature of 183°C

and the eutectic composition of about 62 weight % tin.3

Page 51: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

33

10 20 30 40 J I , I

WEIGHT PER CENT TIN 50 60 TO 80 90

J I I L

20 25 30 35 40 900 1 L - j 1 j - J -

798° \ 153 (25.5)

586*

S355

-350® 20.5(32.55)

I I V 700 10 15

43.1(58.6)

&0r(Cn)

43.5 (59.0) 86.7 92.4

45.5 60.9) 98.7(993) •—44l8(60l3

232#

10 20 30 40 50 60 TO 80 90 100 ATOMIC PER CENT TIN $r

Figure 2.2. Copper-Tin phase diagram.

Page 52: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

34

atmosphere

solder

base / m e t a l Ys

Yh

(a) droplet on a flat plate

liquid solder

(b) equilibrium shape of a droplet in practice

Figure 2.3. (a) Droplet on a flat plate and (b) the equilibrium shape of a droplet

in practice.

Page 53: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

35

Figure 2.4. Interstitial mechanism, elementary jump 11

Page 54: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

36

Figure 2.5. Vacancy mechanism, elementary jump. 11

Page 55: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

37

(a)

o o o o

(a) (b) (c)

Figure 2,6. Free energy G arid configurations (a, b, c) in going through the

saddle point of a jump.10

Page 56: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

38

interfacial energy ccr2

Volume free energy c c r T

Figure 2.7. The free energy change associated with nucleation of a sphere of

radius r.2

Page 57: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

39

Top free surface

Growth direction Solid-liquid

interface

Top free surface

Growth direction

Top free

surface

Growth direction Solid-liquid

interface

\ ^Sol id- l iquid

interface

Growth

direction

Top free surface

w l \ -vs

,S?X<N \ \N

^ V . I / x / */>

- \ N I v 1 / ^)^Solid*liquid

\ /— \ I , / interface

(d)

Figure 2.8. Schematic illustration of various eutectic structures: (a) lamellar, (b)

rodlike, (c) globular and (d) acicular.10

Page 58: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

CHAPTER 2 REFERENCES

1. R.E. Smallman, Modern Physical Metallurgy, 4th Ed., (Butterworths,

Boston, 1985), Chapter. 3.

2. D.A. Porter and K.E. Easterling, Phase Transformations in Metals and

Alloys, 2nd Ed., (Chapman & Hall, New York, 1992).

3. M. Hansen and K. Anderko, Constitution of Binary Alloys, 2nd Ed.,

(McGraw-Hill, New York, 1958).

4. A. Westgren and G. Phragmen, Z. anorg. Chem., 175, 80 (1928).

5. R.J.K. Wassink, Soldering in Electronics, 2nd Ed., (Electrochemical

Publications, Scotland, 1989), Chapter 2.

6 A.R. Miedema and F.J.A. den Broeder, Z. Metallk. 70, 14 (1979).

7 E.E. Braudo, E.N. Michalow and W.B. Tolstogusow, Z. Phys. Chem.,

Leipzig, 253, 369 (1973).

8 A. Bondi, Chem. Rev. 52, 417 (1953).

9 J.W. Mayer and S.S. Lau, Electronic Materials Science: For Integrated

Circuits in Si and GaAs, (Macmillan, New York, 1990).

10. P.G. Shewmon, Transformation in Metals, (McGraw-Hill, New York,

1969).

11. J.R. Manning, Diffusion Kinetics for Atoms in Crystals, (Van Nostrand,

New York, 1968).

12. R.J. Borg and G.J. Diences, An Introduction to Solid State Diffusion,

(Academic Press, New York, 1988).

40

Page 59: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

41

13. K. Huang, Statistical Mechanics, (Wiley, New York, 1987), Chap. 7.

14. B.F. Dyson, T.R. Anthony and D. Turnbull, J. Appl. Phys. 38, 3408

(1967).

15. ibid. 37, 2374 (1966).

16. D.C. Yeh and H.B. Huntington, Phys. Rev. Lett., 53, 1469 (1984).

17. F.H. Huang and H.B. Huntington, Phys. Rev. B9, 1479 (1974).

18. W. Hume-Rothery and G.V. Raynor, The Structure of Metals and Alloys,

(Pergamon Press, New York), p.97.

19. B.F. Dyson, T.R. Anthony and D. Turnbull, J. Appl. Phys., 37, 2370

(1966).

20. W.B. Peatson, The Crystal Chemistry and Physics of Metals and Alloys,

(Wiley, New York, 1972), p. 135.

Page 60: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

CHAPTER 3

SAMPLE PREPARATION

3.1 Cu/solder/Cu Joint Fabrication

Commercial eutectic 63/37 Sn/Pb New Generation Solder Paste

consisting of 88% metal plus 12% water soluble RMA flux by weight, Grade

W-P-9-4, from International Electronic Materials Corporation, lot #1022 701 \

was used throughout this work. The composite solders were fabricated by

mixing preweighed quantities of the solder paste and the powered metals or

intermetallics. Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn intermetallic particles were obtained from the

National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).2 Cu, Ag, Au, Ni and

other metal particles were obtained from Aesar.3

The Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn composites were each ground by hand using an

agate mortar and pestle for 15 minutes prior to mixing. The same mortar and

pestle were used to grind each intermetallic but they were cleaned with

Kimwipes between each use. The other composites, Cu, Ag, Au, and Ni, etc.,

were mixed directly without grinding.

Pre-weighed quantities of the solder paste and particles were then mixed

by hand using a ceramic crucible and plastic spatula for about 30 minutes to

ensure homogeneous distribution of the particles. The weight percentage of the

particulate was calculated on a metal only basis; the weight of the RMA flux

was not included. The weight percentage of each particle type was based on

our ability to fabricate uniform materials and not on the physical characteristics

42

Page 61: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

43

of the composite solders. Seven solders were studied, as listed in Table 3.1.

SEM micrographs of the as-received or after grinding particles were taken in the

secondary electron imaging mode. The sizes of the particles were then

measured.

The copper substrates used in this work were fabricated from copper

pipes with a wall thickness of 1 mm. The pipes were cut using a Buehler

Isomet low speed saw equipped with a diamond blade into rings approximately

2 mm thick. The rings were cut open with tin-snips and flattened. They were

then cut to their final size, approximately 2 mm by 10 mm by 1 mm. These

copper straps were cleaned with acetone and methanol, then cleaned in HCI to

remove surface oxides and contaminates, rinsed in isopropanol in an ultrasonic

cleaner and air dried.

An alumina ceramic susceptor plate, used for more uniform heating, was

preheated on a laboratory hot plate to 250°C. Two copper straps with solder

(or composite solder) paste inbetween (about 1 -2 mm thick) were placed on the

alumina susceptor for 1 to 1.5 minutes for the solder to reflow and form a

soldered connection. The sample was removed from the susceptor and allowed

to cool in air to ambient temperature. The completed copper/composite

solder/copper joint samples were about 3-4 mm thick. After the samples

reached room temperature, they were ultrasonically cleaned in acetone for

about 2 minutes to remove flux residues, and then ultrasonically cleaned in

isopropanol and air dried.

The preceding describes the standard procedure used to prepare

copper/solder/copper joints. For comparing the effect of the cooling rate on the

solder microstructure, two additional sets of copper/eutectic solder/copper

Page 62: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

44

joints were made using different cooling rates, as listed in Table 3.2.

Set I: After the solder joint was formed, the sample was immediately

removed from the hot plate and placed on a large stainless steel plate to cool.

This led to the fast cooling rate. It took less then 1 minute to cool the sample

from 250°C to 50°C.

Set II: After the solder joint was formed, the sample was immediately

removed from the hot plate and placed on a table with wood top and allowed

to cool in air to room temperature. This led to the medium cooling rate. It took

about 5 minutes to cool the sample from 250°C to 50°C.

Set III: After the solder joint was formed, the hot plate was turned off.

The sample remained on the hot plate until it reached room temperature. This

led to the very slow cooling rate. It took about 30 minute to cool the sample

from 250°C to 50°C.

3.2 Annealing Procedure

Both the tops and bottoms of the copper/solder/copper joint samples

were polished with 600 grit silicon carbide paper to remove excess solder.

Blank silicon slabs, about 5 mm thick, were cut with the low speed diamond

saw into pieces approximately 12 mm by 5 mm by 5 mm in size. They were

cleaned in acetone to remove any oil buildup from the saw and were put on the

hot plate which was heated to about 140°C. The silicon pieces were joined to

the top and bottom of the solder joint sample using wax, creating a layered

silicon/copper/solder/copper/silicon sample. The silicon blocks increase the

sample thickness and hardness and facilitate subsequent handling. Cross-

sectional slices about 0.5 mm thick were cut from the coupled block using the

Page 63: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

45

low speed diamond saw. The slices were cleaned with acetone and methanol,

ultrasonically cleaned in Dl water and dried in air. The sample configuration is

illustrated in Figure 3.1.

The slices were annealed in three different, small, benchtop box furnaces

capable of maintaining the temperature to ±3°C. All Cu-containing and Ni

composite solder samples were annealed for 0, 4, 8, 16, 32 and 64 days (0,

96, 192, 384, 768 and 1536 hours) at 110, 120, 130, 140 and 160°C. In

addition to these conditions, Eutectic Solder Only (ESO) samples were annealed

for 0, 4, 8, 16, 32 and 64 days at 150°C, and Cu6Sn5 composite solder

samples were annealed for 0, 4, 8, 16 and 32 days at 150°C. Ag and Au

composite solders were annealed for 0, 4, 8, 16, 32, and 64 days at 120, 140,

and 160°C, and for 0, 4, 8, 16 and 32 days at 110 and 150°C. The complete

sample matrix is shown in Table 3.3.

3.3 SEM Sample Preparation

After annealing (or after soldering for the unaged samples), the sample

was mounted with wax on a stainless steel disk 31 mm in diameter and 12.5

mm in height (called the sample holder) used by a Buehler Minimet

Polisher/Grinder. Since the solder has a low melting point, the temperature was

not allowed to exceed 150°C and the heating time was limited to about 1

minute.

It has been noted that the preparation of solder joints for metallurgical

examination is very much an art.4 Solders are typically soft, while the

intermetallic compounds which form tend to be very hard and brittle. The

substrate can be either soft or hard.4,5 The addition of hard metallic and

Page 64: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

46

intermetallic particles to a soft solder matrix further complicates the situation.

During polishing, the softer phases tend to erode preferentially compared to the

harder phases. Standard metallurgical sample preparation technology was used

to polish these samples, with careful control of the polishing conditions such

as time and pressure.

An annealed sample slice was first ground with 240 grit Buehler silicon

carbide paper to level the face of the sample. The sample was then polished on

600 grit paper to smooth out the scratches introduced by the 240 grit paper.

At this point, a Buehler Minimet Polisher with Microcloth polishing cloths,

Metadi diamond compounds, and Metadi fluid were used to polish the sample

further. Figure 3.2 shows the polisher with a sample holder disk attached.6 The

sample surface touches the polishing cloth inside the bowl. 9 jwm and 15 jiim

diamond pastes were used for the majority of the polishing, followed by 1 and

0.25 /xm diamond pastes. The final polishing step used 0.05 //m alumina slurry,

and was considered complete when no visible scratches were observed on the

sample using an optical microscope at 10x magnification. The sample was

ultrasonically cleaned in Dl water for about 2 minutes between each polishing

step to remove particulate matter to prevent contamination of the polishing

cloths.

The polished samples were etched for 15 seconds in the vapor of reagent

grade (37.4%) HCI to delineate the microstructures of the solder and the

solder/copper interface. After etching, the samples were ultrasonically cleaned

in Dl water.

The polished and etched copper/solder/copper samples were examined

using a JEOL T-300 Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) operating at 1 5 kV.

Page 65: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

47

Images were obtained using a Robinson backscattered electron detector and

were recorded on Polaroid Type 52 or 55 film. A Tracor Northern (TN-5500) X-

ray Energy Dispersive Spectroscopy (XEDS) system was used to analyze the

spectra and to identify the various phases observed.

3.4 TEM Sample Preparation

Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) was used to reveal the

nanostructural characteristics of the different phases within the sample and the

interfacial relationships between these phases. Three different TEM sample

preparation techniques were used for the experiments described here: (1) thin

sectioning by ultramicrotomy, (2) electropolishing and (3) conventional

mechanical polishing followed by ion milling. Ultramicrotomy was the primary

method used throughout the study. The other two sample preparation methods

were used to investigate the effects the sample preparation method on the

observed microstructures.

3.4.1 Ultramicrotomy

The TEM examination of a solder joint is actually somewhat routine, but

the preparation of solder specimens for TEM is perhaps the most difficult in the

realm of materials science.4 To date, there has been only limited success in

preparing solder samples for TEM by the methods traditionally used for

crystalline materials.7,8 The soft tin and lead rich phases are difficult to

mechanically polish without smearing or tearing, and the brittle intermetallic

phases fracture easily. Samples of Sn/Pb solder have been electropolished with

some success.7 However, electrochemical differences between the copper,

Page 66: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

48

intermetallic phases, particulate phases and solder phases make it impossible

to successfully electropolish composite solder/copper samples. Ion milling is

difficult since large differences in the ion milling rates of the numerous phases

lead to preferential thinning of some phases compared to others, resulting in

some phases being electron transparent while others remain electron opaque.

Ultramicrotomy is a viable alternative to these methods because many

of the difficulties encountered with other sample preparation techniques are

avoided. It is possible to obtain sections that are uniformly thin across

heterogeneous phases, which is the primary advantage of this technique.

However, some mechanical damage is introduced which makes detailed studies

of dislocation substructure probbuatical.

Ultramicrotomy involves cutting thin sections with an extremely sharp

knife (usually a diamond knife) from a bulk sample by controlled gravity drop

or a powered motion of a specimen. A typical ultramicrotomy apparatus is

shown in Figure 3.3. During sectioning, the sample block moves past the knife

under the weight of the cantilever arm and the force of gravity. The thin

sections cut from the bulk sample float off the knife edge onto the surface of

a water bath in the knife trough for retrieval.

A key factor in successful ultramicrotomy is careful control of the cutting

conditions. A schematic of the sectioning process, shown in Figure 3.4,

illustrates the geometric parameters that affect material sectioning.

Optimization of the cutting angle (knife bevel angle plus tilt angle) is necessary

to minimize specimen deformation. While the cutting angle is an important

consideration, it is generally a fixed parameter optimized by the knife

manufacturer. The knife angle is chosen for the particular materials to be

Page 67: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

49

sectioned, hard and brittle versus soft and ductile. Low angle knives ranging

from 25-35° are now being touted for reduced compression in ductile materials

but increased edge fragility for harder materials.9,10 Two diamond knives with

bevel angle of 35° or 45° were used throughout this work. The experimental

fine tuning of the sectioning process involves factors such as control of the

laboratory environment, the sectioning rate, and the preparation of the bulk

block sample for sectioning.

Copper/solder/copper joints were prepared as described in section 3.1.

The copper/solder/copper sandwiches were embedded in an epoxy block prior

to ultramicrotomy in order to support them during sectioning and to prevent

pieces of some of the phases from scrolling and detaching from the other

phases. The solder joints were cleaned in acetone to remove residual flux and

oils from handling. After air drying, the samples were carbon coated on both

sides using a JEOL JEE vacuum evaporator. Carbon evaporation was performed

using two ultrapure carbon rods.11 One rod, sharpened to a fine point,was held

by spring loading against the flat face of the second rod (5 mm diameter x 100

mm). In a vacuum of 4.0 x 10"4 torr, a current of 40 - 45 A was applied to the

rods causing carbon to evaporate from the sharpened rod and deposit onto the

sample surface. This process was continued for approximately 15 seconds, and

the carbon thickness was approximately 50 nm. After coating, the samples

were dipped in cyanoacrylate ester (Super Glue)12 and air dried. This treatment

was necessary to insure that the metal samples would adhere to the epoxy

block material and not delaminate during sectioning.

The coated samples were placed into BEEM capsules13 and embedded in

approximately 1 ml of Luft's Epon epoxy resin. Standard mixture "B",

Page 68: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

50

consisting of 25 ml Epon resin 812, 24 ml nadic methyl anhydride hardener,

and DMP-30 accelerator at a ratio of 0.1 ml/5 ml of "B" was used. The resin

was polymerized for approximately 8-12 hours at 60°C.

The embedded block must be trimmed to present a small flat facet to the

knife edge in order to produce good thin sections, and the harder the material,

the smaller this facet must be. A single edged razor blade was used to remove

excess resin from the tip of the solder sample. Once the sample was exposed,

the copper/solder/copper strap was rough trimmed with the razor blade to form

a pyramid whose top was approximately 0.5 mm square which included one

copper/solder interface. The sides of the pyramid sloped at 35-40° angles from

the top. This trimming step, however, resulted in the resin cracking away from

the sides of solder sample, thus requiring a second coating of carbon and re-

embedding with the same Epon epoxy. This sequence is illustrated in Figure

3.5.

The re-embedded sample was trimmed again as follows. The sample was

mounted in the ultramicrotome and a standard 45° glass knife was used to

precisely trim the sample face to its final shape (Figure 3.6). Excess resin was

removed from the sample by manually moving the sample past the knife while

simultaneously advancing the knife holder. When the tip of the sample became

exposed, the knife was positioned at a 30° angle with respect to the tip of the

sample. Excess resin was then gently removed from the sides of the sample.

When enough resin was removed from one side, the block was rotated 90° and

the next side was trimmed. This was repeated until all four sides of the

embedded sample were trimmed. The finished sample face was trapezoidal with

a thin strip of resin surrounding the exposed solder tip.

Page 69: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

51

A Sorval Model MT 6000 Ultramicrotome was used for sectioning the

samples. Figure 3.3 shows the ultramicrotome with an embedded sample

positioned for sectioning. The sample chuck supports the block and is equipped

with 360° x-y and 30° y-z rotational motion for exact positioning along the

knife edge. The chuck is placed into a socket on the cantilever arm. The

solder/copper interface was oriented perpendicular to the parallel sides of the

knife edge. A diamond knife with a bevel angle of 35° was used at a tilt angle

of 6° on a metal base with a trough located behind it. This trough, or "knife

boat" was filled with deionized water. The cutting thickness was set at 20 nm

with a cutting speed of 0.1 mm/sec. During sectioning, the thin sections float

off the knife onto the surface of the water bath because of the surface tension.

Once cut, the thin sections were picked up from the water surface using a thin

metal loop. The sections were placed on 50 or 75 mesh copper grids that were

coated with Formvar and carbon. (Formvar is a polymer coating that supports

the sections on the copper grid.) Excess water was wicked away using the

edge of a sheet of filter paper. The samples were air dried before observation

in the TEM.

Luft's Epon required an overnight oven cure at 60°C. It was thought that

any additional heat treatments might change the microstructures of interest in

the sample. To eliminate questions about how sample preparation might alter

the microstructure, another embedding formulation which cures at room

temperature was developed at the final stage of this study. Elmers Epoxy,14

Resin and Hardener were used to embed the as-soldered eutectic solder/copper

joints, and samples of the bulk eutectic solder which were used to study the

relationship between the solder microstructure and the cooling rate. This epoxy

Page 70: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

52

formulation cures at room temperature in 12 - 24 hours.

3.4.2 Electropolishing

Bulk samples of Sn/Pb eutectic solder were prepared by jet

electropolishing to compare the microstructures observed in samples made

using different preparation techniques. A photograph of a South Bay

Technology Model 550C jet polishing apparatus15 is shown in Figure 3.7. It

includes a chemical container, a chemical pump, a jet nozzle, an LED control

unit, two sapphire light rods, a photodetector, a sample stage and a power

supply. Electropolishing was performed using 85% ethyl alcohol (200 proof) +

5% 2-Butoxyethynol + 10% perchloric acid.7 Immediately before jet polishing,

both sides of the sample were mechanically polished using 600 grit sandpaper

to remove the surface oxide that inhibits smooth electropolishing. The samples

were thinned to a thickness of 100 to 150 jum. Electropolishing was performed

with a bias of 30-34 volts and 80 mA current. During electropolishing, the final

thickness of the sample was automatically controlled using an appropriate

sensitivity setting on the automatic shut-off system. When the sample was thin

enough for light to pass through or when a small hole was made in the sample,

a photodetector automatically turned off the pump motor and terminated the

voltage across the sample. As soon as polishing stopped, the sample was

removed from the stage and rinsed in deionized water to prevent further

thinning or etching. After electropolishing, the sample was immediately

transferred to the TEM for observation. Around the holes electropolished in the

sample are thin areas that are sufficiently electron transparent for TEM

observation.

Page 71: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

53

3.4.3 Conventional Cross-sectional (XTEM) Sample Preparation

Copper/eutectic solder (63Sn/37Pb)/copper samples were prepared using

a conventional cross-sectional TEM sample preparation method, which uses

mechanical polishing followed by ion milling. Again, the goal was to compare

the microstructural differences caused by different sample preparation

techniques.

The basic procedures for preparing an XTEM sample are summarized in

Table 3.4. First, the copper/solder/copper joint and two pieces of silicon about

the same size as the joint sample were cleaned with acetone and methanol, and

then glued together with M-Bond 610 epoxy.16 After gluing, the sample block

was squeezed tightly from both sides using a special vise equipped with Teflon

blocks to make the glue lines between the solder joint and the two pieces of

silicon as thin as possible. The entire sample block held by the vise was heated

in an oven at 120°C for one hour to cure the epoxy. Cross-sectional pieces

about 0.5 mm thick were cut from the block using a low speed saw with a

diamond blade, and 3 mm diameter discs were cut from these pieces using a

Sonic-Mill Model-150 ultrasonic cutter.

Next, standard metallurgical polishing procedures, the same as those

described in section 3.3, SEM Sample Preparation, were used to mechanically

thin the sample disc. After polishing both sides, the disc was usually less than

50 //m thick. Since the 50 /xm thick sample was too fragile to withstand the

rest of the preparation procedure without additional support, a copper ring, 3

mm in diameter, with a hole (2 mm by 1 mm) in the center was attached to the

thin disk using a very small amount of M-Bond epoxy before it is removed from

the stainless steel sample holder. This copper ring is used to support the sample

Page 72: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

54

disc sample during polishing and protects the thin sample from breakage. After

removing the sample from the polishing holder, the sample was mounted on a

glass slide with the copper ring on the bottom. Then the sample was

"dimpled", that is, one surface was made concave using ball grinding. A ball 13

mm in diameter touches the sample surface and rotates with 1 jum diamond

paste and lubricating liquid. A concave dimple is made at the center of the

sample.

The final step of conventional TEM sample preparation is ion milling. A

Gatan Dual Ion Mill Model 600 was used. A polished and dimpled sample is

thinned to electron transparency by sputtering both sides of the sample using

heavy ions (argon). Argon ions are introduced from two ion guns. These two

guns are mounted on a rotatable wheel so that they can be rotated at an angle

relative to the sample surface. The sample stage is continuously rotated during

sputtering to maintain uniformity. The operation conditions of the Ion Mill are:

gun voltage = 3 kV, ion beam current = 0.5 mA/gun, gun tilt angle = 14°,

base vacuum pressure < 1 x 10"6 torr, operation time = 4 - 8 hours. Upon

finishing, the samples were ion milled for 15 minutes at the gun tilt angle ~

8.5°to decrease the ion mill damage. After ion milling, areas of the sample less

than 100 nm thick could be analyzed in the TEM.

3.5 Thin Film Preparation

Since the formation and growth of Cu-Sn intermetallics at the

solder/copper substrate interface during soldering and system use have been

proposed as controlling mechanisms for the solderability and reliability of solder

joints,17,18 there is scientific interest in the diffusion and reaction behavior near

Page 73: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

55

the solder/substrate interface. To determine the mechanisms of intermetallic

formation and the effect of particle additions on diffusion, thin film samples

were observed in-situ in real time using a hot stage in the TEM.

Pure solder is composed of tin and lead. Since tin is the more reactive

species and reacts with Cu, Ni, Ag, Au, etc. to form intermetallics, and since

lead is essentially inert with respect to these metals, the focus of these

experiments was on the direct reaction of Sn with Cu, and the effects of other

elements such as Ni, Au and Ag on these reactions.

Thin films were evaporated using a Veeco 400" Series Evaporator,19

which is shown in Figure 3.8. The base vacuum was 10"5 torr to 10"6 torr (~

1 mPa to 0.1 mPa) and the sources were 99.9% pure metal, each on an

electrically heated tungsten wire. The samples were allowed to cool to room

temperature immediately after evaporation.

Thin amorphous carbon films with a density of 5 ± 3 jug/cm2

(corresponding to 20 ± 10 A thickness) were placed on standard TEM grids

(200 mesh). The carbon films are strong, conductive substrates for subsequent

film deposition. Next, several grids with the carbon films were placed in the

evaporating chamber and held upside down using a copper plate with 3 mm

diameter holes. A continuous 500 A thick layer of copper was evaporated onto

the top surface of the grids. A 500 A thick layer of tin was deposited on the

copper using another TEM grid (50 or 75 mesh) placed under the original

sample as a shadow mask. This resulted in a checkered pattern of square Sn

islands on top of a continuous Cu film. To study the effects of particle

additions, 100 A thick layers of X (X = Ni, Ag or Au) were evaporated. There

were four different configurations as shown in Figure 3.9.

Page 74: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

56

Configuration 1: After evaporating Cu and Sn, X was evaporated on top

of the samples after shifting the shadow mask grid. This resulted in the

samples consisting of continuous Cu films, plus isolated Sn islands, plus X

islands which only partially overlap the Sn islands.

Configuration 2: After evaporating Cu and Sn, without the shadow mask

grid, X was evaporated on top of the samples. This resulted in a continuous X

layer on top of the continuous Cu and Sn islands.

Configuration 3: After evaporating Cu and Sn, without shifting or

eliminating the shadow mask grid, X was evaporated. This resulted in X exactly

on top of the Sn islands.

Configuration 4: X was evaporated after the Cu but before the Sn. This

resulted in samples consisting of continuous Cu, then continuous X, plus

isolated Sn islands.

There were also Sn/Y (Y = Cu, Ni, Ag or Au) samples, which consisted

of 500 A thick Y islands on top of continuous 500 A thick Sn films. The

complete matrix of thin film samples is shown in Table 3.5.

3.6 In-Situ Heating

The samples were placed in a Gatan Single Tilt Heating Holder Model

628 and were observed in a JEOL 100CX TEM. The hot stage is a side entry,

furnace type, single tilt, heating TEM specimen holder which is water cooled

to extend its operating temperature range and to reduce specimen drift by

maintaining a local constant temperature heat sink. The furnace is mounted on

two insulating ceramic balls set in jewelled mounts. The whole suspension

system is spring loaded to accommodate the expansion and contraction which

Page 75: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

57

occur during heating and cooling. The furnace contains a miniature

encapsulated 10 watt heater which is spot welded to two terminal posts in the

specimen tip. One of the terminals is grounded to the specimen rod which acts

as the return current conductor for the heater, and the other is connected via

a copper wire to a 5 pin vacuum feed-through mounted at the end of the

specimen rod. The furnace temperature is measured with a platinum/platinum-

13% rhodium thermocouple spot welded to the furnace body. The

thermocouple leads are anchored by terminals in the specimen tip and are then

fed along the axis of the specimen rod to the five pin vacuum feed-through. A

30 watt current regulated DC power supply provides ripple-free power to the

heater. The furnace temperature is controlled by setting the heater current to

the desired value. A complete calibration of heating stage temperature vs

current was performed in our laboratory.

Page 76: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

58

Table 3.1. Compositions and Particle Size Ranges of the Composite Solders

Particle Type Weight % Particle Size Range Ot/m) Particle Type Weight %

Before Grinding After Grinding

Eutectic solder

only

0 0 N/A

Cu6Sn5 20 1 8 - 4 6 0.7 - 24

Cu3Sn 20 25 - 69 0.7 - 24

Cu 7.6 8 - 1 1 N/A

Au 4 2 - 5 N/A

Ag 4 4 - 7 N/A

Ni 4 2 - 3 N/A

N/A: not applicable.

Page 77: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

59

Table 3.2. Cooling Rates of Different Sample Sets

Sample

Set

Cooling

Rate

Time (seconds) from Start Temp (252°C). Sample

Set

Cooling

Rate 183°C 150°C 100°C 50°C 32°C

1 fast 6.7 10.5 21.5 51.9 143.8

II medium 31.8 54.4 114.7 313.9 759.4

III very slow 279.4 451.1 792.8 1732 2561

Page 78: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Table 3.3. Composite Solder Sample Matrix

X: samples annealed for 0, 4, 8, 16, 32 and 64 days

A: samples annealed for 0, 4, 8, 16 and 32 days

60

Particle

Type

Anneal temperature (°C) Particle

Type 110 120 130 140 150 160

ESO X X X X X X

Cu X X X X X

Cu6Sn5 X X X X A X

Cu3Sn X X X X X

Ni X X X X X

Au A X X A X

Ag A X X A X

Page 79: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

61

Table 3.4. XTEM Sample Preparation Procedure

Step 1. gluing and cutting • solder joint and two piece of silicon are

glued together.

• cross-sectional pieces are cut from glued

block and 3 mm discs are ultrasonically

milled from these pieces.

Step 2. polishing • sand papers, microcloths with diamond

pastes and 0.05 //m Al203 are used to thin

the sample to about 50 //m.

Step 3. dimpling • a rolling ball with 1 //m diamond paste

ground the sample center to form a concave

surface.

Step 4. ion milling • sample was sputtered with argon ions at

14° until its center was less than 100 nm

thick.

Page 80: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

62

Table 3.5. Thin Film Sample Matrix

Type Configuration

Cu/Sn square Sn islands on top of a continuous Cu film

Cu/Sn/Ni config. 1 config. 2 config. 3 config. 4

Cu/Sn/Ag config. 1 config. 2 config. 3

Cu/Sn/Au config. 1 config. 2

Sn/Cu square Cu islands on top of a continuous Sn film

Sn/Ni square Ni islands on top of a continuous Sn film

Sn/Ag square Ag islands on top of a continuous Sn film

Sn/Au square Ag islands on top of a continuous Sn film

The configurations are as shown in Figure 3.9.

Page 81: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

63

Copper/Solder/Copper Joint

Cu Strap

Solder

Cu Strap

t t Silicon Joint Silicon

Glue Togther

Cut Slice

! o>!

CO U i S j 3 O! 9 Q 0 )

CO I

Figure 3.1. Sample configuration of copper/solder/copper joint and silicon

blocks.

Page 82: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

6 4

££ UlJ Q -J O X yj —j a.

O m (3 z X CO

u

0 S X (/)

c o V; "35 o a CD c 1c w "o a 0 C o +-» CO k. 0 TJ o x: -92 o. CO CO

0 "D C u. o I— 0 J= CO o a. +-» 0 E

JC 0 D CD

CNj CO 0 u. D CD

Page 83: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

65

Cantilever Arm

Sample Sample Holder

Diamond Knife

Knife Trough

Figure 3.3. A typical ultramicrotome.

Page 84: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

66

Sample Polymerized Block

Tilt Angle Bevel Angle Rake Angle

t I

Knife

Top Down View of Knife Trough

Thin Sections

Water 111

Figure 3.4. Schematic of sample sectioning using ultramicrotomy.

Page 85: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

67

I Sample

Polymerized Block

;j|x

Rough Trimming

• Rough

Trimming

ft

After Rough Trimming

Sample Re-embedding

Figure 3.5. Sample rough trimming and re-embedding.

Page 86: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

68

Finished Sample Face After Trimming

Figure 3.6. Schematic of steps need for precise trimming of embedded

materials to produce a small facet on the block face.

Page 87: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

69

LED CONTROL UNIT & PHOTO DETECTOR

'kmtmm

j rr mmmw mntvwtm M M MO

auto

pcwe* scwHTwr* auto poitmrr mw

POWER SUPPLY

CHEMICAL CONTAINER

Figure 3.7. South Bay Technology Model 550C jet polisher. 15

Page 88: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

70

Figure 3.8. Veeco VE-400 Evaporateor 19

Page 89: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

71

Figure 3.9. Schematics of thin film sample configurations.

Page 90: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

CHAPTER 3 REFERENCES

1. International Electronic Materials Corporation, 30275 Bainbridge Road,

Cleveland, OH 44139.

2. National Institute of Standards and Technology, Gaithersburg, MD

20899.

3. Aesar, Inc., 30 Bond Street, Ward Hill, MA 01835.

4. A.D. Roming, Jr., Y.A. Chang, J.J. Stephens, D.R. Frear, V. Marcotte

and C. Lea, In Solder Mechanics: A State of the Art Assessment, D.R.

Frear, W.B. Jones and K.R. Kinsman Eds., (TMS, PA, 1990), Chpter 2.

5. ASM Metals Handbook, Metallography and Microstructures, 9th ed,

(ASM International, 1985).

6. Instruction Manual for 69 - 1000 Minimet Polisher/Grinder, Buehler Ltd.,

41 Waukegan, Lake Bluff, IL 60044.

7. D.R. Frear, Ph.D. Thesis, University of California at Berkeley, 1987.

8. S.F. Dirnfield and J.J. Ramon, Welding Journal, 48, 373 (1990).

9. J.-C. Jesior, J. Ultrastr. and Mol. Str. Res., 95, 210 (1986).

10. J.-C. Jesior, Scanning Microscopy Supplement, 3, 147 (1989).

11. JEOL SVC, JEOL Engineering Service Company, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan.

12. Duro, Loctite Corp., Cleveland, OH 44128.

13. Ted Pella, Inc., 4595 Mountain Lakes Blud., Redding, CA 96003.

14. Borden, Inc., HPPG, Columbus, OH 43215.

72

Page 91: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

73

15. South Bay Technology, Inc., 1120 Via Callejon, San Clemente, CA

92672.

16. Micro-Measurements Division, Measurements Group, Inc., Raleigh, NC

27611.

17. D.S. Dunn, T.F. Marinis, W.M. Sherry and C.J. Williams, Mater. Res.

Soc. Symp. Proc., 40, 129 (1985).

18. P.E. Davis, M.E. Warwick and S.J. Muckett, Plating and Surface

Finishing, 70, 49 (1983).

19. Veeco Instruments Inc., Terminal Drive, Plainview, NY.

Page 92: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

CHAPTER 4

INTERMETALLICS AT THE INTERFACES OF

COMPOSITE SOLDER/COPPER JOINTS

4.1 Introduction

Intermetallic compounds such as Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn are known to form

and grow at solder/copper substrate interfaces during soldering and system

use.1The formation and growth of these intermetallics have been proposed as

controlling mechanisms for the solderability and reliability of solder joints.2 In

this chapter, the results of solid state diffusion kinetic and microstructural

studies of intermetallic formation in copper/composite solder/copper samples

are reported. The intermetallics at the solder/copper interface were examined

as functions of time, temperature and particle composition. The samples were

prepared according to the experimental procedures outlined in Chapter 3, and

were characterized using scanning electron microscopy (SEM), transmission

electron microscopy (TEM), x-ray energy dispersive spectroscopy (XEDS) and

scanning transmission electron microscopy (STEM) as described in Appendix

B and Appendix C.

4.2 Microstructure of Composite Solder/Copper Substrate Interface

Figure 4.1a is an SEM micrograph of the intermetallics formed at the

interface between eutectic solder and the copper substrate after annealing for

32 days at 120°C. Starting at the bottom of the micrograph, the observed

74

Page 93: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

75

phases are the copper substrate (A), Cu3Sn (e-phase) adjacent to the copper

substrate (B), Cu6Sn5 (rj-phase) adjacent to the solder (C), the light contrast Pb-

rich phase (D) and dark contrast Sn-rich phase (E) in the solder matrix. These

phases were unambiguously identified using XEDS in the SEM and the spectra

are shown in Figure 4.1b. These phase identifications were verified using

selected area electron diffraction patterns (SADP) in the TEM. Since the

diffraction line intensities were not recorded, in this study rj (unordered) and r\'

(ordered) Cu6Sn5 phase (discussed in Appendix A) are treated as the same

phase.

Figures 4.2 and 4.3 are two series of micrographs which demonstrate

the growth of the intermetallic layers with annealing. Figure 4.2 shows the

microstructure of the as-soldered (unaged) Cu composite solder and the

microstructures after 8 and 64 days at 120°C. Figure 4.3 shows the

microstructure of the Ag composite solder after 32 days at 120, 140, and

160°C. Two intermetallic layers form at the solder/copper interface. The two

intermetallics increase in thickness with time and elevated temperature. The

Cu6Sn5 layer is generally thicker than the Cu3Sn layer. As shown in Figure 4.2a,

a thin and irregular Cu6Sn5 layer, but no Cu3Sn layer, is visible in the as-

soldered state, and this Cu6Sn5 layer is already continuous. It should be noted

that similar to Figure 4.2a, Cu3Sn was never observed in unaged sample using

SEM. Annealing was always required for the Cu3Sn to become thick enough to

be visible in the SEM.

In Figure 4.2b, a copper particle is visible surrounded by a layer of

Cu3Sn, followed by a layer of Cu6Sn5. These two intermetallics formed in a

manner similar to the intermetallics at the solder/copper substrate interface. If

Page 94: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

76

the anneal time is long enough and a large amount of Sn is present, the Cu

particles completely transform to the thermodynamically favored Cu6Sn5 phase

(Figure 4.2c). The Ag particles in the Ag composite solder react with Sn to

form Ag3Sn during soldering and annealing. There are Ag or Ag3Sn particles in

the composite matrix. With annealing, more and more Ag particles transform

to Ag3Sn. The eutectic solder matrix and composite solder matrices will be

discussed in detail in the next chapter.

Figure 4.4 shows the solder/copper interface for the eutectic solder

(Figure 4.4a), Cu3Sn (Figure 4.4b), Cu6Sn5 (Figure 4.4c), Cu (Figure 4.4d), Au

(Figure 4.4e), Ag (Figure 4.4f), and Ni (Figure 4.4g) composites after annealing

at 140°C for 16 days. Except for the Ni composite solder (Figure 4.4g), these

results are similar to the Sn/Pb eutectic solder case. However, the particles

added to the solder affect the thicknesses and morphologies of the intermetallic

layers. The Cu6Sn5 layers in the Cu, Cu3Sn and Cu6Sn5 composite solders are

all slightly thinner than in the eutectic solder only sample, and the Cu3Sn layers

are thicker. The opposite effects occur for Ag, Au, and Ni composite solders:

the Cu6Sn5 layers are thicker and the Cu3Sn layers thinner than for the eutectic

solder.

To address the issues regarding the nanostructure of the interfacial

intermetallics and the solder matrix, it is necessary to examine the

solder/copper joints using transmission electron microscopy. As described in

Chapter 3, it is possible to prepare the solder/copper joint sample for

examination by TEM using ultramicrotomy. All phases are uniformly thin. For

the first time, the copper substrate, Pb-rich and Sn-rich phases of the solder,

the metallic and intermetallic particles in composite solder, and the intermetallic

Page 95: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

77

layers at the solder/substrate interface were observed and analyzed by TEM

simultaneously in a single sample.

A TEM micrograph of a eutectic solder/copper joint aged at 140°C for 4

days is shown in Figure 4.5. In this micrograph, the copper, solder, and

intermetallic phases are visible and variations in the grain morphology of each

phase are readily distinguishable. The intermetallics probably extend upwards

from the interface. Electron diffraction studies were performed and the patterns

for the Cu, Cu3Sn, and Cu6Sn5 phases are shown in Figure 4.6. These patterns

were indexed and the phases were positively identified with at least 10 d-

spacings in agreement with the literature values.3 The interplanar d-spacings for

these phases are listed in Appendix A.

For as-soldered samples before annealing, only a thin, irregular Cu6Sn5

layer was observed using SEM. Cu3Sn was not visible in any of the samples,

including the eutectic solder. Similar observations have led some researchers

to conclude that Cu3Sn does not form during soldering, but only during high

temperature annealing.4,5,6,7 Cu3Sn should occur immediately, however, based

on the Cu/Sn phase diagram and classical solid state phase transformation

theory. Figures 4.7a and 4.7b are SEM and TEM micrographs of a Cu6Sn5

composite solder joint in the as-soldered state showing the solder/copper

substrate interface. In a TEM micrograph (Figure 4.7b), two intermetallic layers

are visible between the solder matrix and the copper substrate. The Cu3Sn layer

is about 0.2 to 0.3 fim thick and cannot be seen in the SEM micrograph of a

similar area (Figure 4.7a). These results confirm that Cu3Sn forms during

soldering, but may not be visible because of the spatial resolution limits of

SEM. The Cu3Sn becomes observable by SEM only after intermetallic growth

Page 96: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

78

occurs.

Figures 4.8 to 4.13 show the interfacial region between the solder and

copper substrate for different types of solder in the as-soldered state. The

Figures are for Cu3Sn, Cu6Sn5, Cu, Ag, Au, and Ni composite solders,

respectively. Except for the Ni composite, a thin Cu3Sn intermetallic layer exists

between the Cu6Sn5 and the Cu substrate for all the solders. The Cu3Sn layer

in the Ag and Au composites is much thinner than in the eutectic solder and

Cu, Cu3Sn, Cu6Sn5 composites. The Cu3Sn layer is 0.07 - 0.15 fim thick in Ag

and Au composites and 0.2 - 0.3 j»m thick in eutectic and Cu, Cu3Sn, Cu6Sn5

composite solders. For the Ni composite solder in the as-soldered state, no

continued Cu3Sn layer was observed.

The microstructures of the solder/copper interfacial regions after

annealing for 4 days at 140°C for Cu, Cu3Sn and Ag composite solder are

shown in Figures 4.14, 4.15 and 4.16, respectively. Figure 4.17 shows the

interfacial area of the Ni composite after annealing for 8 days at 140°C. For the

eutectic and composite solders, two intermetallic layers increase in thickness

with annealing. After annealing at 140°C for 4 days, the thickness of the Cu3Sn

layer is on the order of 0.3 jum (0.2 - 0.4 jum) for the Ag composite (Figure

4.16), and 0.4 jum (0.2 - 0.6 jum) for the Au composite, which is much less

than the 1 .0 - 1.2 jum thickness of the Cu (Figure 4.14), Cu3Sn (Figure 4.15)

and Cu6Sn5 composites, and the eutectic solder (Figure 4.5). The Cu3Sn layer

may be very thin, if it exists at all, in the Ni composite solder after annealing

at 140°C for 8 days (< 0.2 - 0.3 jum).

The observed grain size are widely different for each phase. The solder

Page 97: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

79

matrix consists of Pb-rich regions within very large Sn-rich regions, which will

be discussed in Chapter 5. The copper substrate is extremely fined grained

material. The Cu6Sn5 phase has columnar (rod-like) grains, whereas the Cu3Sn

phase has a more equiaxed grain structure. The as-soldered Cu3Sn phase has

a grain size on the order of 0.2 - 0.3 jum, and the grain size of the Cu6Sn5

phase is on the order of 0.5 - 1 j«m. With annealing, coarsening occurs. After

140°C for 4 days, the Cu6Sn5 grains were much rounder and larger, and their

diameters increased to 1 - 2 jiim. The Cu3Sn phase only increased to 0.3 - 0.4

jum. The Cu3Sn grains may be seen in Figures 4.5, 4.8 and 4.9. The columnar

morphology of the Cu6Sn5 is shown in Figures 4.8 and 4.9. These grains are

each a single crystal of Cu6Sn5. This morphology for Cu6Sn5 has also been

observed by Warwick and Muckett.8

Some of the small microstructural features visible in these TEM

micrographs may be due to artifacts caused by the ultramicrotomy used for

sample preparation.9 Contamination or dulling of the knife blade is often the

source of extraneous features. Striations were observed at relatively evenly

spaced intervals parallel to the direction of sectioning. These knife marks may

result from a dull knife that has microchipping or contamination along the blade

edge. In some areas, tearing of the intermetallic phases was observed.

Intermetallic tearing could be avoided by cleaning the blade or by using an area

of the blade free of pieces of resin or metal. Brittle phase tearing similar to that

shown in the TEM micrographs has been observed by others.10,11 This is

attributed to a combination of shearing and brittle fracture.7

Another common sectioning artifact is "chatter," characterized by

Page 98: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

80

regularly spaced areas of light and dark contrast aligned perpendicular to the

sectioning direction. This is caused by vibration of the specimen during

sectioning. The chatter is minimized if sectioning is performed in the early

morning or late at night when people were rarely in the laboratory. It is

hypothesized that in our laboratory, chatter is caused by floor and building

vibrations.

4.3 The Formation of Microvoids

It was suggested by Lucey et al.12 that microvoids may form either

within the intermetallic layers or at their interfaces, and extend to the surface

of the solder joint. The microvoids could link together to form a conduit for

impurities and oxygen diffusion from the external environment to interact with

the subsurface intermetallic layer, resulting in a loss of solderability. However,

there is no experimental evidence that clearly supports this model.

After careful examination the SEM and TEM micrographs, it was

determined that microvoids do not form at the solder/copper substrate interface

for eutectic solder and composite solders in the as-soldered state, except for

the Ni composite solder. After long time, high temperature annealing,

microvoids may form. At this point, as shown in Figure 4.18, the Cu3Sn layer

might transform totally or partially to Cu6Sn5 with additional annealing. The

Cu3Sn layer stops growing. The thickness data for samples in this condition

were not used for calculation of the diffusion coefficients.

The microstructure of the Ni composite solder is different than the

microstructure of any the other samples. Under certain annealing conditions,

as shown in Figure 4.4g and Figure 4.19b, Cu3Sn is not observed and there is

Page 99: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

81

a large concentration of voids in the Cu6Sn5, especially in the lower half of the

intermetallic layer where Cu3Sn is expected to occur. Even though for some

anneal conditions microvoids are not present, the Cu3Sn layer at the interface

is extremely thin compared to other solders (Figure 4.19a) or even completely

invisible. There are no clear rules about the conditions under which microvoids

are present and no Cu3Sn layer exist.

The microvoids discussed above are Kirkendall voids generated when

different chemical components in a system have unequal diffusion coefficients.

They form along a line at the intermetallic/copper substrate interface. These

voids do not link and extend through the intermetallic layers to the

intermetallic/solder interface. They are different than those "microtunnels"

proposed by Lucey et al.12

4.4 Activation Energies of Intermetallic Formation in Eutectic Solder and

Composite Solders

There are two limiting conditions for intermetallic formation and growth

in the solder/copper substrate system. First, when diffusion through the

growing intermetallic layer may be the rate-limiting factor (diffusion controlled

growth). Second, an interfacial reaction is the rate-limiting step (reaction

controlled growth).

The thicknesses of the Cu3Sn and Cu6Sn5 were measured with a

digitizing tablet interfaced to a personal computer. SEM micrographs of the

solder/copper interface region were placed on the digitizer pad and a calibrated

pointer was used to encode pairs of points representing a single measurement

of the intermetallic thickness. A minimum of 100 such measurements, equally

Page 100: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

82

spaced along the interface, were made for each thickness reported. This

procedure results in high quality data that can be reliably analyzed with

statistical significance. After digitization, the distributions of the measurements,

the average thickness, the standard deviation, and the maximum and minimum

thickness values were calculated. The average thickness values were used to

represent the thickness of the intermetallic layers. Table 4.1 is an example of

the statistical parameters calculated for the thickness measurements of Cu6Sn5

in Au composite solder.

Figures 4.20 and 4.21 are plots of the solder/copper interface

thicknesses versus the square root of annealing time for Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn in

eutectic solder at 140°C and Cu composite solder at 120°C, respectively. The

linear correlation coefficients for the data, in Figures 4.20 (R2 = 0.94 for Cu6Sn5

and R2 = 0.95 for Cu3Sn), and 4.21 (R2 = 0.95 for Cu6Sn5 and R2 = 0.98 for

Cu3Sn), as well as for other anneal temperatures and in other types of

composite solders suggests that the growth of these intermetallics is diffusion-

controlled over the temperature range 110 to 160°C and that it follows a simple

parabolic relationship. In more general terms, intermetallic formation is a

thermally activated process.

As derived in Chapter 2, the diffusion coefficient may be calculated using

d = {Dt <4-1>

where d = layer thickness, D = diffusion coefficient and t = time. Values for

D are calculated by plotting the intermetallic thickness versus the square root

of the anneal time. The diffusion coefficients for Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn in eutectic

solder at 140°C and in Cu composite solder at 120°C were calculated using

Page 101: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

83

Equation 4.1 and are shown in Figure 4.20 and Figure 4.21, respectively. The

measured intermetallic thicknesses and the diffusion coefficient at each

temperature for each type of solder are listed in Table 4.2 (eutectic solder),

Table 4.3 (Cu composite solder), Table 4.4 (Cu3Sn composite solder), Table 4.5

(Cu6Sn5 composite solder), Table 4.6 (Ag composite solder), Table 4.7 (Au

composite solder), and Table 4.8 (Ni composite solder). The correlation

coefficients, R2, are generally found to be greater than 0.9 for all the eutectic

and composite solders, except the Ni composite solder. The excellent linear

correlations demonstrate that the diffusion model is valid. The lower correlation

for the Ni composite solder may be attributed to the increased irregularity of the

Cu6Sn5 intermetallic layer. Great difficulty was encountered in measuring the

thickness of this layer due to its highly irregular and porous nature, and to the

uncontrolled occurrence of microvoids, as described above.

The activation energies for the formation of Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn may be

calculated using the relation:

D=DQe-MT (4.2)

which was derivated in Chapter 2. D = diffusion coefficient, D0 = diffusion

constant, Q = activation energy, k = Boltzmann constant and T = absolute

temperature.

Figures 4.22 and 4.23 are plots of ln(D) versus 1/T for intermetallic

formation in the Cu composite and Au composite solders, respectively. Again,

the linear correlation coefficients, R2, for the activation energy plots for all

solders are greater than 0.9. The linear fits are very good, demonstrating that

the model is indeed appropriate. The activation energies for formation of Cu6Sn5

Page 102: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

84

and Cu3Sn for eutectic solder in the temperature range 110 to 160°C are 0.84

eV (18.5 Kcal/mol) and 1.63 eV (44.9 Kcal/mol), respectively. The values are

in reasonable agreement with previously published data.13,14,15,16,17 The

activation energies for intermetallic formation for the eutectic solder and

composite solders are listed in Table 4.9. The growth of the intermetallic layers

at the interface is strongly affected by the particle type added to the solder. Cu-

containing particle additions increase the activation energy for Cu6Sn5 formation

and decrease the activation energy for Cu3Sn formation compared to the

eutectic solder alone. Ag and Au particles decrease the activation energies for

both Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn formation. Ni particles drastically increase the activation

energy for Cu6Sn5 formation.

4.5 In-Situ Thin Film Diffusion Couple Studies

As a general rule for binary diffusion couples, the element with the lower

melting point has the larger diffusion constant. Therefore, for the Cu-Sn

system, Sn should be the faster diffuser in the Cu-Sn system. Diffusion couple

experiments in the literature18,19,20 proved that Sn is the faster diffuser.

Experiments reported in the literature for diffusion couples of Cu and Sn have

found that Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn intermetallics form in the Cu substrate below any

diffusion barrier layers (Sn, Ni, Co, Cu6Sn5, etc.) added between the Cu and

Sn.21 This implies that the Sn diffuses into the Cu much more rapidly than the

Cu diffuses into the Sn. To obtain direct information about the mechanisms of

Cu/Sn intermetallic formation and growth at the solder/substrate interface and

the effect of other particle additions, Cu/Sn and Cu/Sn/X (X = Ni, Ag or Au)

thin film samples were observed in real time in the TEM while annealing the

Page 103: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

85

samples using a hot stage.

The types of thin film samples and the sample preparation methods were

described in Chapter 3. Since thin films were deposited by evaporation, the Cu,

Sn, Ni, Ag and Au films are polycrystalline. The morphologies of these thin

films are shown in Figure 4.24. It is clear that the grain sizes and morphology

are so different for each element that they can be easily distinguished.

For Sn-islands on a Cu substrate, intermetallic formation and growth with

annealing are demonstrated in Figure 4.25, which is a time series of TEM

micrographs showing the Cu-Sn intermetallic growth. As shown in Figure 4.25,

intermetallic formation begins at the Sn/Cu boundary and progresses laterally

from the Sn into the Cu. The original Sn/Cu boundary remained stationary. This

is an expected result since Sn is the faster diffuser in the system. Lateral

growth is observable because the Cu and Sn are extremely thin (500 A)

compared to their length and width. It is also possible that the oxygen and

carbon present on the surface of the Cu (because the films were deposited in

a conventional vacuum system) prevents the interdiffusion of the metallic films,

as proposed by Dufner.22

There are two distinct intermetallics after annealing. As shown in Figure

4.25c the growth nearest the Sn is most likely Cu6Sn5, whereas the one

adjacent to the Cu is probably Cu3Sn. The intermetallic phases were identified

using selected electron diffraction patterns from each region. Furthermore,

these two phases can also be easily distinguished by their grain sizes, i.e. the

grain size of Cu3Sn is smaller than that of Cu6Sn5, as in the TEM cross-sectional

micrograph of solder/copper joints.

Heating also causes microstructural changes in the Cu and Sn layers. The

Page 104: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

86

Cu layer undergoes a rapid microstructural change when it is first heated, and

becomes more uniform. The Sn layer density decreases with time as the

intermetallic layers grow and become thicker. In addition, the Sn layer near the

Sn/Cu boundary becomes thinner with longer anneal times and, in extreme

cases, scattered void formation was observed in the Sn closest to the interface.

All these results indicate that Sn diffusion into the Cu must occur for

intermetallic formation to take place. The growth of the intermetallics requires

the diffusion of Sn through Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn followed by reaction with Cu. Cu

does not diffuse into the solder to any appreciable extent.

There are several other characteristics of the intermetallic regions shown

in Figure 4.25. First, microvoid formation occurs at the Cu/intermetallic

interface. The void formation was prolific at the intermetallic growth front, and

the voids continuously evolved and preceded this front. Second, there was a

formation of "finger-like" projections regions. These protrusions are one or both

of the intermetallics. With annealing, these regions expanded and joined

together laterally. Third, in the Cu6Sn5 intermetallic region, "electron dense,"

structures formed. The formation of these structures was sensitive to the

temperature. With higher anneal temperature, they formed faster. This "electron

dense" was also observed by Pouraghabagheret al. at high temperature range

(350°C - 450°C).23

For Cu islands on top of a continuous Sn layer, intermetallic formation

took place where the Cu and Sn overlapped, and no lateral intermetallic

formation was observed. Since this is a Sn rich system, the intermetallic was

mainly Cu6Sn5.

For Cu/Ni/Sn samples, when a continuous Ni barrier is deposited

Page 105: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

87

inbetween the Cu and Sn, (thin film sample configuration 4, Chapter 3, page

58 and 73), or deposited on top of the Cu and Sn islands, (thin film sample

configuration 2 and configuration 3), lateral intermetallic formation is

completely suppressed, even when the Ni layer is only 100 A thick. No

intermetallics were observed after annealing at 250°C for several hours. This

is in agreement with the use of Ni plating of copper printed circuit board

conductors to maintain solderability after long storage times.24 Since Ni

minimizes Cu-Sn intermetallic formation, it enhances solderability.

For samples consisting of continuous Cu films plus isolated Sn islands,

plus Ni islands which only partially overlap the Sn (configuration 1), at 250°C,

intermetallic formation begins in some areas at the Sn/Cu boundary. The

annealing behavior is the same as for the Cu/Sn samples described above. In

other areas, as shown in Figure 4.26, there was no intermetallic growth even

after annealing at 250°C for 30 minutes followed by 200°C for 24 hours. XEDS

was used to identify the chemical composition. XEDS spectra show that in the

areas with intermetallic growth, there is no Ni on top of the Sn or at the

interface. For the areas without intermetallic growth, Figure 4.27 shows the

XEDS peak intensity ratio of Ni to Sn as function of probe positions. The probe

was placed on the Cu side, at the Cu/Sn interface, and at several positions on

the Sn side, as labeled in Figure 4.26. The XEDS results demonstrate that Ni

is present at the Cu/Sn interface and that there is a lateral Ni concentration

gradient from the interface into the Sn. This implies that the Ni diffuses through

the Sn layer to the Sn/Cu interface. Once the Ni reaches the interface, it may

act as a barrier which prevents Sn from diffusing into the Cu, and thus inhibits

Sn/Cu intermetallic reactions, even though it is present in extremely small

Page 106: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

88

concentrations.

Previous published data indicates that diffusion of Au and Sn in Au-Sn

alloys is strongly concentration dependent.25 For the Sn/Au thin film sample,

in the Sn-rich region, Au atoms diffuse rapidly into the tin matrix via an

interstitial mechanism.26 In the Au-rich region, however, Au can diffuse only via

a vacancy mechanism and thus the diffusivities of Au and Sn in Au are

generally small. When Au and Sn are brought into contact with each other,

even at room temperature, the Au diffuses rapidly into the Sn via an interstitial

mechanism and forms the intermetallic phase AuSn4. This process is enhanced

with high temperature (200-250°C) annealing. For the Cu/Sn/Au sample, with

annealing, the Au first diffuses rapidly into the Sn and forms AuSn4

intermetallic. The diffusion of Sn into the Cu is inhibited until all of the Au is

reacts with Sn to form AuSn4.

For the Sn/Ag sample, similar to the Sn/Au sample, Ag diffuses into the

Sn and forms Ag-Sn intermetallic. This process is slower than in the Sn/Au

sample, since the diffusivity of Ag in Sn is smaller than that of Au in Sn.25 For

the Cu/Sn/Ag sample, with annealing, the diffusion of the Sn into the Cu and

the Ag into the Sn occurs simultaneously.

For the Sn/Ni sample, with high temperature annealing, Ni diffuses into

the Sn and forms a Ni-Sn intermetallic. With in-situ TEM observation, it was

found that the rate Ni-Sn intermetallic formation is slower than Au-Sn

intermetallic, and even slower than Ag-Sn intermetallic formation. In the

temperature range from room temperature to 400°C, the diffusivity of various

elements in Sn is: Ni > Au > Ag.27 The low Ni-Sn intermetallic formation rate

may be explained as follows. There are two factors related to X-Sn intermetallic

Page 107: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

89

formation in the Sn/X thin film samples (X = Au, Ag and Ni). One is the

diffusivity of X in Sn. The other is the nucleation rate for intermetallic

formation. The X-Sn intermetallics may be formed by nucleation directly from

the Sn phase.28 For the cases of Sn/Au and Sn/Ag thin films, the limiting factor

for the formation of the intermetallic phase is the diffusivity of Au and Ag in

Sn, respectively. For the case of Sn/Ni thin films, the limiting factor is the

nucleation rate. This explanation is consistent with the observations of the

Cu/Sn/Ni thin film samples that the Ni does not completely react with Sn to

form Ni-Sn intermetallic, but diffuses rapidly to the Sn/Cu interface and acts as

a barrier preventing Sn from diffusing into the Cu.

4.6 Diffusion Mechanisms

The diffusion and reaction of the Sn and Cu result in the formation and

growth of the Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn intermetallics at the solder/copper substrate

interface. Based on the studies of these intermetallic layers using SEM and

TEM, and the in-situ observations, the formation of the intermetallics is thought

to occur via the following mechanisms, which are diagrammed in Figure 4.28.

Initially after soldering, thin layers of both Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn are formed at the

solder/copper substrate interface. The 17-phase, Cu6Sn5, forms adjacent to the

solder and the e-phase, Cu3Sn, forms adjacent to the copper substrate. With

annealing, Sn diffuses through the Cu6Sn5 phase to the tj/e interface, and reacts

there with the Cu3Sn to form Cu6Sn5. The Sn also diffuses through the Cu3Sn

phase to the e/Cu interface and reacts there with the Cu causing the Cu3Sn

layer to grow in thickness as well. Based on the morphology of the 17 and e

Page 108: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

90

phases, Sn diffusion mainly occurs through the grain boundaries.

Additional evidence of the tin being the mobile species in the

solder/copper system is provided by the AuSn4 and Ag3Sn particles which are

in the solder side and along the solder/Cu6Sn5 interface in the Au and Ag

(Figure 4.3b) composite solders, respectively. Although these particles could

have been deposited here by transfer from the solder during the mechanical

polishing used for sample preparation, it is more likely that they are a residue

of the reaction between the added particles and the solder. These intermetallic

particles can act as diffusion markers. If Cu is the faster diffuser, the particles

should be inside the Cu6Sn5 or Cu3Sn intermetallic layers, or along the

copper/Cu3Sn interface. This is not the case. Their position on the solder side

of the interface is consistent with Sn being the mobile species.

Another phenomenon observed in this system is Pb enrichment at the

solder/Cu6Sn5 interface after annealing. The solder near this region is depleted

of Sn, as shown in Figure 4.1. The total length of the intermetallic/solder

interface and the length of the interface contacted by the Pb-rich phase were

measured using a digitizing tablet. The ratios of the area contacted by the Pb-

rich phase to the total interfacial area were calculated for various anneal

conditions and are listed in Table 4.10. For the eutectic solder before annealing,

the ratio was approximately 0.16. After annealing for 4 days at 160°C, this

ratio increased to approximately 0.9. This ratio did not increase after additional

annealing at 160°C. One explanation for this behavior is that at the start of

annealing, there is a large amount of Sn at the interface that can readily react

with the Cu. With continued annealing, the amount of immediately available Sn

decreases, creating a Sn concentration gradient in the solder and increasing the

Page 109: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

91

ratio of Pb-rich phase contact area to total interfacial area. Subsequently, the

Sn supply at the interface becomes dependent on Sn diffusion through the

solder to the interface. At equilibrium, a Sn concentration gradient is formed in

the solder and the ratio of Pb-rich area to total interface area is approximately

constant over time.

The particles in the composite solders strongly affect the diffusion

behavior of Sn, and therefore affect Cu-Sn intermetallic formation at the

solder/copper substrate interface. The thicknesses of the intermetallic layers for

all seven samples in the as-soldered state and after annealing for 16 days at

140°C are shown in Figures 4.29 and 4.30. The measurements were performed

from SEM micrographs as previously described, except for the thicknesses of

the Cu3Sn layer before annealing which were measured from TEM micrographs.

One interesting feature of the data is that none of the particles, except Ni,

strongly affect the initial thickness of the Cu6Sn5 layer. However, after annealing

for 16 days at 140°C, trends are evident in both the Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn

thicknesses. The composite solders with Cu-containing and Fe particles all

reduce the Cu6Sn5 thickness and increase the Cu3Sn thickness with respect to

the eutectic solder. Ag, Au, Ni and Pd all reduce the amount of Cu3Sn at the

interface. The Fe and Pd samples will be discussed later.

As listed in Table 4.9, all of the Cu-containing particles increase the

activation energy for Cu6Sn5 formation, but reduce the activation energy for

Cu3Sn formation compared to eutectic solder. The Au and Ag composite

solders have smaller activation energy values for the formation of Cu6Sn5 and

Cu3Sn. The activation energy for the formation of Cu6Sn5 in the Ni composite

solder is very large and the activation energy for Cu3Sn formation can not be

Page 110: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

92

determined because Cu3Sn is not always observed.

Intermetallic formation is a strong function of the activation energy: For

large values of Q, the temperature dependence is enhanced. Depending on the

D0 values and the initial intermetallic thicknesses, Cu6Sn5 can be the dominant

phase at low temperatures, but Cu3Sn can dominate at high temperatures. This,

in fact, is what is experimentally observed. For the short time soldering

sequences, the exposure to high temperature is minimal and the Cu6Sn5 is

preferentially formed. The formation of Cu3Sn is kinetically limited and may or

may not be observable using optical microscopy or SEM depending on the exact

soldering conditions used. During high temperature processing, however, more

Cu3Sn is formed than Cu6Sn5 (compared to the initial amounts) and both

intermetallics become observable. The TEM observations confirm this model,

since Cu3Sn is always observed in as-soldered samples, even though it is very

thin. Cu3Sn growth dominates at high temperature because its activation

energy is larger than that of Cu6Sn5.

Au and Ag composite solders have smaller Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn activation

energies than eutectic solder. The Cu3Sn is very thin after the initial soldering

operation (< 0.2 ixm) and it always remains thinner than the Cu6Sn5 layer, even

after high temperature and long time annealing. Au can rapidly diffuse by an

interstitial diffusion mechanism in the Sn matrix.26 During soldering, all the Au

particles in the solder matrix react completely with Sn to form AuSn4, thus

reducing the amount of Sn that is able to reach the solder/copper interface. The

initial thickness of Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn after soldering are thinner than for the

eutectic solder only sample and Cu-containing composite solder samples

(section 4.2). After soldering, the AuSn4 particles are distributed uniformly in

Page 111: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

93

the solder matrix. (The microstructure of the solder matrix will be discussed in

chapter 5 in detail). Buene et al29 studied the room temperature diffusion of

Au/Sn thin film couples and found that Sn might diffuse through the Au-Sn

intermetallic very quickly via the grain boundaries. The diffusion coefficient of

Sn through Au-Sn intermetallic is about 105 larger than Sn self-diffusion. Figure

4.31 is a TEM micrograph which shows the Au composite solder matrix after

annealing at 140°C for 4 days. There are two AuSn4 particles in contact with

each other. Both AuSn4 grains contact the Sn-rich phase of the solder. These

phases were all identified using selected area electron diffraction patterns. The

AuSn4/AuSn4 grain boundary (labeled 1) and AuSn4/Sn phase boundary (labeled

2) are clearly visible. XEDS in STEM mode was used to determine the Sn/Au

ratios along the AuSn4/AuSn4 grain boundary and AuSn4/Sn phase boundary,

and these were compared to the Sn/Au ratios inside the AuSn4 phase, which

were measured 200 A away from the boundary toward the center of the AuSn4

grain. The results of these measurements are shown in Figure 4.32. The

average XEDS peak intensity ratio of Sn to Au at the boundaries is 2.3, much

larger than the average value of 1.1 inside the AuSn4 grains. This means that

the AuSn4 grain boundaries and the AuSn4/Au phase boundaries may act as

enhanced diffusion pathway for Sn. Since the Sn can diffuse easily along these

boundaries after soldering, the Sn supply to the solder/copper interface is

greater than for the eutectic solder only. The Sn moves via normal bulk

diffusion of the Sn in the areas without AuSn4, and via the much faster

boundary diffusion through AuSn4/AuSn4 grain boundaries and AuSn4/Au phase

boundaries. This enhances the Sn diffusion and reduces the activation energies

for the formation of both Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn at the Au composite solder/copper

Page 112: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

94

interface compared to the eutectic solder only.

The difference between the Ag and Au composite solders is that all of

the Au particles react completely with Sn to form AuSn4, whereas the Ag

particles are not completely transformed to Ag3Sn during the soldering

operation. After soldering, both Ag and Ag3Sn particles occur in the solder

matrix. The remaining Ag particles may act as Sn-sinks. They remove Sn from

the solder and reduce the amount of Sn available for reaction at the substrate

interface. The Ag particles continue to react with the Sn until the terminal

phase Ag3Sn formed. The Sn-sink and enhanced diffusion through Ag3Sn/Ag3Sn

grain boundaries and Ag3Sn/Sn phase boundaries diffusion mechanisms are

competive processes. In the case of Ag composite solder, the increase in

boundary diffusion is dominant, and the overall effect is that the Cu6Sn5 and

Cu3Sn activation energies are smaller than for the eutectic solder, but larger

than for the Au composite solder.

Compared to eutectic solder alone, the Cu-containing particles all

increase the activation energy of Cu6Sn5 formation and, therefore reduce its

thickness. These particles also decrease the activation energy for Cu3Sn

formation and enhance its thickness. There are two possible mechanisms which

can occur in the solder matrices of these alloys. The Cu and Cu3Sn particles act

as Sn-sinks. They remove Sn from the solder and reduce the amount of Sn

available for reaction at the substrate interface. The particles continue to react

with the Sn until the terminal phase Cu6Sn5 is formed. Thus, the amount of Sn

that reaches the solder/copper substrate interface in a given period of time is

reduced.

However, this mechanism may not be the only way in which the

Page 113: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

95

activation energies are affected. Sn-sinks do not explain why the presence of

Cu6Sn5 particles (the terminal phase) also alters the kinetic data. Cu6Sn5

particles do not directly react with the solder. It has been experimentally

verified that they do not change shape or phase with annealing, so it may be

assumed that they are chemically inert in Sn/Pb solder and do not act as Sn-

sinks. To investigate the effect of Cu6Sn5 particle additions on Sn diffusion, a

10 w t% Cu6Sn5 composite solder was fabricated. These samples were

annealed at 150°C for 0, 4, 16 and 32 days, and the Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn

intermetallics at the solder/copper interface were examined. Table 4.11 gives

the intermetallic thicknesses and diffusion coefficients at 150°C for both 10

w t% Cu6Sn5 composite solder and 20 wt% Cu6Sn5 composite solder. From

Table 4.11 it can be seen that all the intermetallic thicknesses of Cu6Sn5 and

Cu3Sn for the 20 wt% Cu6Sn5 composite solder/copper interface are thicker

than the corresponding thicknesses for 10 wt% Cu6Sn5 composite solder under

the same annealing conditions. Therefore, the diffusion coefficients are larger

for 20 wt% Cu6Sn5 composite solder than for 10 wt% Cu6Sn5 composite

solder. Since the Cu6Sn5 phase is the terminal phase in the system, the Cu6Sn5

phases do not react with Sn. The only difference between these two composite

solders is that there are more Cu6Sn5 particles in the 20 wt% Cu6Sn5 composite

solder and therefore there are more Cu6Sn5 grain and phase boundaries. These

boundaries enhance Sn diffusion. It is postulated here that enhanced boundary

diffusion exists in all-Cu containing composite solders. The values of the

activation energies in Cu-containing composite solders support this postulate.

20 wt% of intermetallic particles were added to the solder matrix for both the

Cu3Sn and Cu6Sn5 composite solders. Comparing these two composite solders,

Page 114: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

96

the activation energy changes for 20wt % Cu3Sn composite solder are larger

than those for 20 wt% Cu6Sn5 composite solder compared to the eutectic

solder alone. For the 7.6 wt% Cu composite solder, since fewer particles were

added to the solder matrix, there are fewer boundaries that can enhance the Sn

diffusion, hence the changes in activation energy are smaller than for 20 wt%

Cu6Sn5 composite solder. Since Cu, Cu3Sn and Cu6Sn5 particles are larger than

the AuSn4 and Ag3Sn particles, the ratio of the areas of the Cu-containing

phase/Sn boundary are smaller than for the Au and Ag composite solders. Thus

the enhanced boundary diffusion effects are also smaller.

Intermetallic formation for the Ni composite solder is quite different than

for the other composite solders. Cu3Sn formation is almost completely

suppressed. The thickness of the Cu6Sn5 layer is increased over that observed

for the eutectic solder alone and other composite solders, but a substantial

fraction of the volume is void space.

One way of analyzing the activation energy data for the Ni composite

solder is to note that the activation energies for the formation of Cu3Sn and

Cu6Sn5 intermetallics are both greatly increased. Since Cu3Sn is not usually

observed, its activation energy may be assumed to have been raised to a very

large value. The activation energy for Cu6Sn5 formation is 1.58 eV, an increase

of 1.9 over that observed for the eutectic solder alone. It should also be noted

that the Ni particles are only 4 wt% of the composite solder, which makes their

effectiveness even more marked.

Ni acts as an extremely effective diffusion barrier making it difficult for

the Sn to diffuse into the Cu. The excess Sn on the solder side of the interface

makes the Sn-rich intermetallic phase favored, hence Cu6Sn5, the intermetallic

Page 115: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

97

with the largest Sn/Cu ratio, is formed. During annealing, or even during

soldering, Ni from the added particles diffuses to the interface and blocks any

additional Sn from moving from the solder into the Cu. This effect is observed

in the in-situ thin film annealing experiments. Ni drastically inhibits intermetallic

formation when it is placed between the Cu and the Sn, and also when it is

placed on top of the Sn without direct contact with the substrate Cu. The voids

in the intermetallic layer, as shown in Figure 4.19, may be due to the

Kirkendahl Effect, that is, due to differences in the diffusivities of the two

species, Cu and Sn. The voids occur in the area where Cu mass transport is

greatest, closest to the Cu substrate. The Ni diffuses rapidly through the solder

via an interstitial mechanism to the interface where it prevents Sn diffusion.

However, Cu may not be prevented from diffusing through the Ni barrier layer

quite so effectively. Kirkendahl voids would be formed as the Cu closest to the

substrate diffuses to the solder and reacts with the Sn there to form Cu6Sn5.

This is consistent with the microstructural observation that there are Pb-rich

phases and Ni3Sn4 intermetallic phases inside the Cu6Sn5 interface layer (Figure

4.19) which means that Cu diffuses into the solder. This is also consistent with

the XEDS spectra inside the Cu6Sn5 interface layer where a small Ni peak is

observed.

There is an observed tendency that the thicknesses of the intermetallics

depart from the d proportional to t,/2 behavior, typically after high temperature

and long time annealing. It appears that it is the supply of Sn to the Cu

substrate which is in some way restricted. One possibility is the presence of

the voids at the intermetallic/copper substrate interface, as shown in Figure

4.19. Voids would limit the flow of the Sn into the Cu substrate. Another

Page 116: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

98

possibility is that coarsening is occurring in the two intermetallic layers,

inhibiting the movement of Sn via grain boundaries since with coarsening the

ratio of the grain boundary areas to a given volume decreases. With TEM,

coarsening of the two intermetallic phases with annealing is observed, as

discussed in section 4.2. Another possibility is that the segregation of an

impurity to the grain boundaries of the intermetallic phases is limiting the rate

of reaction of the Sn, so that the system is no longer diffusion controlled. Lead

is one possible candidate, since no impurities were detected in this study.

4.7 Microstructures of Fe and Pd Composite solders

After comparing the equilibrium phase-diagrams30 and diffusion

characteristics of Cu-Sn with Fe-Sn, and of Ni-Sn with Pd-Sn (and many

others), the prediction was made that the microstructures of the intermetallic

interface at the solder/copper substrate should be similar for Fe and Cu-

containing additions, and similar for Ni and Pd composite solders. For example,

Fe, like Cu, forms a number of intermetallic phases with Sn. However, Pd

behaves more like Ni, forming a solid solution with Cu. Figure 4.33 shows the

interface of the Fe composite solder after annealing at 140°C for 4 days. Figure

4.34 shows the intermetallic interface of the Pd composite solder after

annealing at 140°C for 16 days. The similarities of the microstructures of the

Cu to the Fe, and the Ni to the Pd composite solders are striking, in keeping

with the predictions. Likewise, the intermetallic thickness data for Fe and Pd

composite solders, included in Figure 4.30, are similar to the Cu-containing

composites and Ni composite, respectively.

Page 117: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

99

4.8 Summary and Conclusions of Chapter 4

During soldering, both Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn form at the solder/copper

substrate interface. The 77-phase Cu6Sn5 forms adjacent to the solder and the

e - p h a s e Cu3Sn is adjacent to the Cu substrate. Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn both increase

in thickness with increasing anneal time and temperature. The activation

energies for the formation of Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn at the interfaces of eutectic

solder and six types of composite solders/copper substrate were determined.

The growth of the intermetallic layers at the interface is strongly affected

by the particle type added to the solder. Cu-containing particle additions reduce

the thickness of Cu6Sn5 and increase the thickness of Cu3Sn. They increase the

activation energy for Cu6Sn5 formation and decrease the activation energy for

Cu3Sn formation compared to the eutectic solder alone. Ag and Au particles

decrease the activation energies for both Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn formation. Ni

particles drastically reduce the Cu3Sn thickness to near zero and increase the

thickness of Cu6Sn5. However, the Cu6Sn5 contains a substantial volume

fraction of voids close to the Cu substrate.

TEM was used to investigate the nanostrucutres of the eutectic and

composite solder/copper systems and the interfacial relationships among the

different phases. Studies of the intermetallic layers in TEM showed that the e-

phase has a columnar morphology while ij-phase has a rod like faceted

morphology. Cu3Sn was observable at the solder/copper interface in as-soldered

samples only by using TEM. It was not observable using SEM.

To determine the mechanisms of intermetallic formation at the

solder/copper interface and the effect of particle additions on intermetallic

growth, Cu/Sn, Cu/Sn/Ni, etc. thin film samples were annealed in the TEM in-

Page 118: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

100

situ using a hot stage. For the Cu/Sn thin film sample, it was found that

intermetallic formation begins at the Sn/Cu boundary and progresses laterally

from the Sn into the Cu. It was also found that Ni may act as a barrier which

prevents Sn from diffusing into Cu, thus inhibiting Cu-Sn intermetallic

formation.

Based on the SEM and TEM studies and in-situ TEM thin film

observations, a Sn diffusion model and the Sn diffusion mechanisms affected

by particles in composite solders were proposed. The growth of Cu-Sn

intermetallics at the solder/copper substrate interface requires the diffusion of

Sn through Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn followed by reaction with Cu; Cu does not

diffuse into the solder to any appreciate extent.

There are two mechanisms which explain the effects of the particle

additions on the kinetics of intermetallic formation. First, the grain boundaries

of the intermetallic particles and the intermetallic particle/Sn phase boundaries

in the solder matrix may act as enhanced diffusion pathways for Sn, thus

increasing the Sn supply at the solder/copper interface. Second, the Cu, Cu3Sn

and Ag particles act as Sn-sinks which remove Sn from the solder and decrease

the amount of Sn available for reaction at the solder/substrate interface.

Ni is an extremely effective diffusion barrier which completely prevents

Sn from diffusing into Cu. The activation energy for Cu6Sn5 formation is

dramatically increased compared to the eutectic solder samples.

Page 119: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

101

V) 4-J C 0

E <D 1— 3 CO CD CD

-O 0 +-» JO D -2 CD O CO K. 0 +-» 0 E (0 K-CD CL

15 O V> co •+-I CD +-i CO

.92 -Q CD

0 O CD H— I— 0

CO 5J CO CI 0 a c o

O O <£

JO 0 I— 2 0 o JC CO +-»

o -t; CO o a E o O D <

0

CD C O 4-» CD E

LO c CO CO

D u

+-» "D C 0 ™

0 " 0 |

CD ^ 0 jj 0 CL CO Q

-O C M ° CD \P -P "O TO £

S CD > ^ +-> 0 CO Q

c w

E CO 3 0 ^

. 1 5 E C O 3 K LC

C CO C (0 U 0 E c .= X O

it 0 CO CD 0 CD C | - G

<5 E

O 3-

0 -Q E 3

0 5 C W 0 CD C 0 C

3 G £ £ .I « < H S

CI ̂ E ^ 0 2^ H-

SO 0S

A> CD

VO O^ CD rv

IR) CNI

VP

CM CO

CD

CD CO

CD

0S

CD CD CD CM

SP

O CSJ

0S

LO O CD CNI

0S

CM

O CM

SP 0S

LD CD

0S

CD CO a!

SP 8S

IV LD

CD CM

VP

0S

RV

0S

CD 00 CD

VP

CM 00

CO CM 1̂"

CD ID 00 CO 00

O

CO RV

CD 00

IV ID O

LO CD

CO CM

ID O

O CO

CO RV CO

CD CD

CM O

rv CM O

CD

CM

O IV

CO

CD LD

LO CM

CD O

CM CO

CM

00 CD

CM

CO CD

CO

00 O LD

O ID

O CM

CO

CO CO O CD

CM CD

CM rv

CM

00 q CD

LO LD CD

CM

rv LO

CM

CD CD

CO CD

O CO

CM

CO O CO

CM

CO

CD CO

CM

CD rv

CM q CO

ID CD

00

O CD

CO

LO

ID

CD CM

LO rv

CD

CD CD CM

CO O CM

IV CD

IV CD LD

O CM CM

rv CD

IV CO CO

CD O CO

00 "3"

CD <S|-

LO rv

00 LD

"U 0 O) CD c D

00 CD CM CO 00 CD CM

CO CO 00 CD CM CO

O CM

O LO

Page 120: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

102

0 ;u o co o

"+-»

o 0 +-» D LLI

0) +-» C 0

O H— M— 0 o o c o "w D

"D C CD

E 3 V) 0 CO C/) 0 C o 1c h-

CD 4—' 0

E v_ 0 4—' c CN

JX> -Q CD I -

2 o 0 0

CN

0 1

0.7

36

60

8'L

00 00 o o 2

.84

6

0.1

90

3.9

76

00 CD

8.2

25

1.9

99

16.9

7

7.0

23

CM DC

CD O)

o

rv CD

o

00 G) o

00 G>

o

G) 0) o 0

.94

G)

o

o>

o

ay G>

o

CN CD

o G) o

An

ne

al

Tim

e (d

ays)

o LO CD

CO

< z

An

ne

al

Tim

e (d

ays)

<sl" CD

r—

CO

< z CN O) CO

00 r—

o CN

LO

rv o *—

CO

LO

o o 00

00 00

O q

csi

An

ne

al

Tim

e (d

ays) CN

CO CO o CN

< z 00 00 csi

CN o

00 rv 00 0

.70

00 CN

o o cn

o CO

O rv

An

ne

al

Tim

e (d

ays)

CD \ —

00 < z o LO csi 0

.54

00

00 LO o

00 o o CN CN

LO

G> CN

00

An

ne

al

Tim

e (d

ays)

00 r— LO

< z G) 00 CN

00 00 o

CD LO csi

o

o

CN

00

00 LO G) CN

CO CO

o

* —

CN

LO LO A

nn

ea

l T

ime

(d

ays)

<s|-CO

r—

< z CO

0.2

6

CO

csi

00 00 o

00 CN

rv 00 o

00 00

CO 00 o

G> rv 00

66

0

An

ne

al

Tim

e (d

ays)

o CO

o CN rv o

o 00

o CN hs o

o 00 T— r—

o CN

o o

Inte

r-m

eta

llic

ID c

CO CO

3 o

c </)

co D o

LO c 0)

CO D o

c CO

CO D

o

ID c

CO CO D u

c CO

CO D o

LO c

CO CO D u

c CO

CO D o

ID c

CO CO

D O

c CO

CO D

o

LO c

CO CO

D o

c CO

CO D

O

Tem

p

(°C

) o t—

o CN

o CO

a o LO

o CO r—

Page 121: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

1 0 3

0 [U

O CO

0

CO O a

E o o

D o

CO

r̂ "

CO +-»

c 0 o M— H— 0 o O

c o

*co D

"D C CD

0) 0 CO CO 0 c

o

jc

CD

0

E i— 0 -M

jC

CO

JD X ) CD

T O O CD

CO

CM

E Q o

CO CO

o

CO

CM

o

2.09

0.902

2.97

CM

9.49

o o

15.7

7.41

CN cc

CO O )

CO G)

LO 0 )

00 0 ) O )

00 G>

rv 0 )

00 CD

LO G> CN

cc o a o o o O o o o o

64 LO o

CM CD LO 00

CO LO

to rv

rv o

64

CM r- 00 CM csi 00

CM CO

00 o o

CO 00

O 0 ) o

00 CO

CO io

00 q

hs

q

r-00 CM

CO csi 00 r— 00

CO

CD

3 CO

G> o

CM rv

r> rv 00

0 ) CO

o q

o q

00 q

0

E

r-" o csi csi r— CO r-" LO 00 0

E

i~

15 0 00

rv G)

LO LO

o 00

CM o q

CM o q

00 LO CO

G) CM

c c

o o t-" r-" c\i

<

CM 00 LO

G) hs

00 rv

T— o

CM 00

LO

q CM CM LO

LO

q

o o O o o r " 00

o

0 ) LO

o

o

0.69

o

0.59

o

690

o

0.69

o

Inter-

metallic

LO c CO CD D o

c CO CO D o

in C CO CO D o

c CO CO 3 o

UO c CO CO D o

c CO CO D o

LO c CO CD D O

c CO CO D o

to c CO CO 13 o

c CO CO D o

Temp

(°C)

110

120

130

140

160

Page 122: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

1 0 4

0 ;u

o co

o -jH 0) o Q.

E o U

c CO CO

3 o

o CNI

0) +-»

c 0 [o

H—

0 o o

c o *0) 3

"U c CD

£ 3

0) 0 (/) 0) 0 c o

CD +-»

0

£ u. 0 4-» c

_0

JQ CD

2 o

o 0

^ CO

— - CM

o §

C D

00 CNI

o 0.461

00

o

1.77

CNI

1.77

o C O

4.70

II

19.7

CNJ

q

C D

CNI

DC

L O

C D

00 C D

o o C D

L O

C D

0 )

o > C D

L O

C D C D

C D

C D

O o r- o O o o O o o

C D

,!d" hs

00 to

00 L O CNJ

L O

o L O

00 L O

00 C D

T— r— 00 00 00 L O L O

32 C D

C N

o 00

00 00 C O 00

rv 00

C D

00 00 q

C O

00 C O

L O

32

r— p- CNi T— CNJ CNJ osi 00 ''t

15) >

CD

H 15) >

CD

H C D C N

o rv 00

rv rv

00 L O

(O C O

L O

00 L O

CNI

o G) C O

00 G) 0 £

o r-" r— C N osi rv osi 0 £

H

15 0 00

C D

00 C D

C O

00 L O

00 CNJ

o o

00 o

00 CNI

rv C O

L O G) c o o r— r— r-* CNJ V-" r-̂

<

00 C O

C D 00 00

o o

C D

rv 00 L O (D CNI

C D

00 C O

rv rv

o o r— t- o o o

O

390

o

0.98

o

990

o

00 C D

o

o

00 C D

o

o

Inter-

metallic

i n

C

0 ) CO

13 o

c CO

CO

D

O

LO

C

CO CO

D o

c CO

CO

D o

i n

C CO

CO

D o

c CO

CO

D o

i n

C

CO CO

D o

c CO

CO

D o

i n

C

CO CO

D

o

c CO

CO

D

o

Temp

(°C)

110

120

130

140

160

Page 123: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

105

0 2 o cn 0 'co o a £ o O in C cn CO

D o

o CM

CO +->

c 0

[o H— 0 o O c o "(0 D

"D C CD

E 3 0) 0 0) CO 0 c J* o

CD +->

0

E 0 +-» c in <fr

_0 -Q CD h-

2 a o 0

CO CM

Q o 0.3

27

00 00 o 2.

27 00

00 o

CN 00

00 o

ID

r— r— 4.

41

II

CD

00 CN 7.

42

CM

DC

CD CD

o

00 c d

o

L O

C D

o

00 0 )

o

L O

C D

O

c d

0 )

o

CD a> o

I V

CD

o

O

o

o o

C D

CD 0 )

ID 00

o v—

CD CN CD

L O

L O

L O

C D CN C D

CN 00 CN 00 L O

CNI

00 00 - CD

CD 00 rv

CM r *

rv o 00

CD CD

00 C D CNI

00 r- csi CN * — L O CN

CO

CD 3

C D LO 00

r** O) a>

CN CD

00 CN

00 CN

o r v

00 0 E

r— o o r-̂ 00 CN 00 0 E h-

15 0 00

c d

CD 00 L O

CD 00 CD

rv 00 o

rv L O

00 o L O

o 00

c c o o o r— CN L O CN

<

r v 00 00

o o

o rv 00 00 r v

CN 00

L O

CN r v O

L O

o o o o o o r—

O CD CD

o o

CN 00 o

o CD CD

O o

CN 00 o

o CN 00 o

o

Inte

r-m

etal

lic

lO C 0) CO D o

c C/) CO D u

to C 0) to

D o

c C/) CO D o

LO c C/) CO D o

c 0) CO

D o

LO c 0) CO

D o

c CO CO

D o

LO c CO to D

o

c CO CO

D o

Tem

p

(°C

) o r—

o CN

o 00 o

r—

o CD

Page 124: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

106

0 [U O CO

0 HH "55 o a E o o U)

<

£ <s|-

w 4-» c 0 o H— H— 0 o o c o '55 D

"D C cu

£ 3 03 0 0) (0 0 c o lc h-

co 4-» 0

E v_ 0 4-»

_C

CD

JD -D CD

2 o 0 °

CM

0 1

1.4

7 00

00 o o

|| zzz

G>

o 5.5

2

1.5

1

7.9

5

2.5

9

o

00 CNJ

00 00

Csl DC

00 CD

o 0.9

8

0.9

6 6

60 0

.98

0.9

2 8

60 0

.94

0.9

0 6

60

64

4.4

5

LO o

r— 11

.2

CO

LO

32 00

o 0> o LO

00 CO

00 rs o CNI <x>

CNJ 00

00 o

rv CO

32

00 o 00 o LO oi LO OJ a> 00

CO > CO

3

0

E

CO 00 cni

CNJ 0.2

97

00 00 0

.61

4

4.2

2

0.9

6 00

CNI 00

2.5

0

i -15 0 c (—

00

1.9

9 V

/N 2

.46 V

/N 2

.82 L

L0 3

.93

1.1

4

00

1.8

1

<

1.5

3 V

/N 1

.74 V

/N 2

.52 V

/N 3

.07

0.7

4 00

CO

0.8

9

o CO o o

CO o o

CO o o

1.0

6

o 00 o o

Inte

r-m

eta

llic

lO C

CO CO

D u

c CO CO

3 o

LO c

CO CO Z3 o

c CO CO

D o

LO c

CO CO

D o

c CO CO

D o

LO c

CO CO

D o

c CO CO

D o

LO c

CO CO

D o

c CO CO

Z3 o

Q.

£ o m o

o T—

o CN

o o LO

o CO

h- r— r "

Page 125: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

107

CD

32 o CO 0 •M CO o a E o o D <

i— O H— CO 4—' c 0 [o 4— H— 0 O O c o "co "D

H— H— b "D c CD

£ 3 CO 0 CO CO 0 c J* o 1c h-

CD •M 0

£ u. 0 +-» c

hs _0

JQ CD

2 o o ° ^ CO

CN Q o

2.0

3

0.1

14

8.7

6

0.1

76

CD

G)

o

LD 00 CNI

00 o

41

.5

2.3

7

CN QC

00 o>

o o o>

00 G)

CD O)

o o

O o

o o

00 o>

G> CD CN

QC o o o o o O

co o *—

00

0 q

01

CNI 00

CM

00

00 CD ID o

ID 0)

o hs o

hs

00 r—

LD rv ai

CD rv 00

CN LD CN

CO CD CD

00 o G)

00 T— CD

0) CD 00 O)

00 O) CN

rv LD

rv q

0 £ 00 o 00 o LD o 00 0 £

P 15 0 c c <

CO o 00 csi

CD 00 CNI o

0) hs CN

ID o

ID o 00

o ID <3-o

LD LD

O) 00 o

LD LD rv

00 CNJ

00 CD <

z CD 00 CNI

T— 00 o

CNI q cnJ

hs 00 00 o

o q

00

LD CD O

00 (O

LD

<3* o

O CD

o o

CD 0) o

o CD O)

o o

CD 0) o

O CD 0") o

o

Inte

r-m

eta

llic

lO c CO

CO D o

c CO

CO Z3 o

LO c CO

CO D o

c CO

CO D o

UT) c CO

CO D o

c CO

CO 3 o

in c CO

CO D o

c CO

CO 3 O

LO c CO

CO D o

c CO

CO Zf o

Tem

p

(°C

) o o CNI

o o LD

o CD

Page 126: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

108

0 T3 O cn 0 -M

"co o a £ o o

NP 0s

<sl" k .

o H— CO

C 0

jo M— H— 0 O o c o

'co D

"D C CD

E 3 co 0 CO 0) 0 c j*: a

CD •M 0

E 0 •M c 00

_0 J D CD

H

2 o o 0

Jl CO CM

• o

1.1

51

12.6

0

8.2

71

00 CNI O 00 4

75

.2

CM

DC LO 00

CO 00

rv 00

LO 00

r— 00 CM

DC o o o o o

CD LO

r-N LO

LO 00

CNI CO

CD 00 00

32

o 00

CO CO

rv 00

<s|-00

32

00 rs" LO

CO > CD 13 0 E

CO r— 3

.21

4.1

4

CO CNI 00 8

.28

29

.92

F 15 0 c c <

00

3.4

5

2.8

1

2.8

3

4.7

2

10.3

1

O) CO

00 00

St r—

CO CO t—

00 csi csi 00 CNI G)

o rv LO

rv LO LO

rv LO LO

r - v"~ r-

Inte

r-m

etal

lic

i n

C CO

CO

D (J

i n

C C/)

CO

D o

m

C if)

CO

D o

LO

c V)

CO

D o

i n

C cn

CO

D o

Tem

p (°

C)

110

120

II 13

0

140

160

Page 127: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

109

Table 4.9 Activation Energies (eV) for Intermetallic Formation

for the Eutectic Solder and Composite Solders

Solder Alloy Type Cu6Sn5 Cu3Sn Solder Alloy Type

Q R2 Q R2

eutectic solder 0.84 0.98 1.63 0.96

7.6 wt% Cu 1.00 0.92 0.96 0.95

20 wt% Cu3Sn 1.31 0.99 0.81 0.94

20 wt% Cu6Sn5 1.23 0.94 0.91 0.94

4 wt% Ag 0.73 0.95 1.18 0.99

4 wt% Au 0.65 0.98 0.85 0.99

4 wt% Ni 1.55 0.92 N/A

Page 128: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

110

Table 4.10 The Ratio of the Area Contacted by the Pb-rich Phase

to the Total Interfacial Area of the Solder/Cu Interface

Solder Type Anneal Condition Ratio

eutectic solder as-soldered 0.16 eutectic solder

4 days at 160°C 0.92

eutectic solder

8 days at 160°C 0.92

20 wt% Cu6Sn5 composite 4 days at 160°C 0.78 20 wt% Cu6Sn5 composite

8 days at 160°C 0.77

20 wt% Cu6Sn5 composite

16 days at 160°C 0.80

20 wt% Cu3Sn composite 4 days at 160°C 0.78 20 wt% Cu3Sn composite

8 days at 160°C 0.90

20 wt% Cu3Sn composite

16 days at 160°C 0.90

4 wt% Au composite as-soldered 0.24 4 wt% Au composite

4 days at 160°C 0.70

4 wt% Au composite

8 days at 160°C 0.74

Page 129: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

111

0 o CD

H— 1—

0 •M j c

D o

V—

0 ] •

o (/) 0

CD

C C/)

CO

D o

T3 C CD in

C 0 )

CD

Z3 o

E 3

0) 0 0) CO 0 c o 'sz H

J 0 - Q CD

H

0 3 2 O

0 )

0

'(/) o o .

E o

o ID

c C/) CD

D o

o CN

" D C CD

0) •M C 0 o

H— H— 0 o

O

c o 0) D

0 - C +-»

" D C CD

- O O ®

— - CM

o !

0) >

CD

3

0

£ i -15 0 c c <

CN 00

CD

0 a >

I -V -

0 33

o CO

o

15

0

E

0 +-» c

CN LO

CO

o LO

r*N CO

CO

r -CO csi

I D r >

o ° «> 4 _ j v—

s %

° 5

o CO

00

00 LO

i d

o CO

LO

CVJ

CN 00

+-• c

i w .

° o CN ^

LO c

C/) CO

D (J

00 CN

00

r v

CN

T—

00

00 CO

00

o

CN

00

CN

00 CN <J>

LO

c co

CO

D o

\ 0 0s"

CM

to c

C/) CO

D o

c 0 ) CO

D o

Page 130: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

112

(a) SEM microstructure

Figure 4.1. (a) SEM microstructure and (b) XEDS spectra of eutectic

solder/copper substrate sample after annealing at 120°C for 32 days. (A) Cu

substrate, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich phase.

Page 131: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

113

1 { j ; j j j j i j

i \ i ! \ i 1 1 1 ! - — — ~ - r — ~ ; : — • • U

1 1 j ! | | | U

si i ! ! ! i . L _ I

J 1 1 1 1 1 i

| A ! i 5 i i C ! F ! 1 5 1 C 1 J

j p" r*x """1 i * i £ ! i

l „.-T.

(A) Cu

1 1 • i \ j

; i i s ! : i

I j ! ! ; |

i i i s !

ud 1 1

1 j L; , i h \ n.

"N""f™

1 1 j L;

, i h \ n.

l | - c F ill c j

n a J ilflrC R "E

•fs.,. '"11 r'" u

L i.

(B) Cu3Sn

; 1 : N

• ; j j ; j j j

1 1 i i si I I j

1 ' j i J f i j ! ) : 1

^ 5 1 | | | I p- i

" " T—I si A

m j j r

| s i l f J ft c !

j l i J r jrJ- r_>r^f j e j jil u

!frjy ,•« "i

(C) Cu6Sn5

(b) XEDS Spectra

Page 132: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

114

:

f M ; ! ! : ; •!

: ; : _ : • i i _ J •

_ ; ; r-: _ ; • L :

: f S : i t : ; !

! : _j : i ! i i

: ! ! ?

1 i !

f E ® 3

-Jn B bT

WhTr> rrrrrrrr ft 1

(D) Pb-rich phase

s N

i

P s-k

&

hfuTlf

s- • r » Uib^rrr k

rzrrrrTn E

(E) Sn-rieh phase

(b) XEDS Spectra

Page 133: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

115

m

s

(a) as-soldered

Figure 4.2. SEM microstructures of Cu composite solder/copper substrate

samples as a function of annealing time, (a) as-soldered state, (b) 120°C for 8

days, (c) 120°C for 64 days. The Cu6Sn5 layer is general thicker than the Cu3Sn

layer. A Cu particle is visible in (a) surrounded by Cu6Sn5. Another Cu particle

is visible in (b) surrounded by Cu3Sn and Cu6Sn5. The particle visible in (c) has

completely transformed to Cu6Sn5. (A) Cu substrate, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D)

Pb-rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich phase.

Page 134: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

116

(b) 120°C for 8 days

(c) 120°C for 64 days

Page 135: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

117

(a) 120°C

Figure 4.3. SEM microstructures of Ag composite solder/copper substrate

samples as a function of annealing temperature, (a) 120°C, (b) 140°C and (c)

160°C for 32 days. The particles in the matrix are Ag and Ag3Sn. (A) Cu

substrate, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich phase.

Page 136: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

118

1

'C

•B

(b) 140°C

(c) 160°C

Page 137: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

119

(a) eutectic solder

Figure 4.4. SEM microstructures of the eutectic solder and composite

solder/copper substrate interfaces after annealing at 140°C for 16 days, (a)

eutectic solder, (b) 20 wt% Cu3Sn composite solder, (c) 20 w t% Cu6Sn5

composite solder, (d) 7.6 wt% Cu composite solder, (e) 4 w t% Au composite

solder, (f) 4 w t% Ag composite solder, and (g) 4 wt% Ni composite solder. The

particle additions affect the thicknesses and morphologies of the intermetallic

layers at the interface. (A) Cu substrate, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-rich

phase, and (E) Sn-rich phase.

Page 138: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

120

t n i B i

JS IMS ! SH Ibttia

(b) 20 wt% Cu3Sn

(c) 20 wt% Cu6Sn5

Page 139: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

121

15 5 0 8 i-St.

(d) 7.6 wt% Cu

(e) 4 wt% Au

Page 140: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

122

(f) 4 wt% Ag

void

(g) 4 wt% Ni

Page 141: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

123

Figure 4.5. TEM micrograph of a eutectic solder/copper joint after annealing at

140°C for 4 days. The copper, solder and intermetallic phases are all visible. (A)

Cu substrate, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich phase.

Page 142: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

124

(a) Cu6Sn6

(b) Cu3Sn

TMWMlif

(c) Cu

Figure 4.6. Selected area diffraction patterns of the (a) Cu6Sn5, (b) Cu3Sn, and

(c) copper phases in Figure 4.5.

Page 143: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

125

* r v * *

T3 o k_ 0

2 0 CO 1 CO CD CD

CO O CL

"D CD ib. CD 2 0 CO 1 CO

CD

+-»

CO o a E o Q 10

C 05

CD

D U

L U t/>

CD

0 "O ±: c CO CO o . a. 0 C CO £ 0 _c U CL

Jp-C c O (/) -iZ

<0 I D jQ O CL E 2 ~ "D 0

o O IjD c C/) <0 u

yj h-

0 TJ LD c CO CD

3 CO (J CD _

O CO

0 o

c O co

S § CD OQ

CD 0 1 E 0 CO J Q

C 3 — CO 0 •

Q.UJ CD r-L_ • ) JQ

O — «"g E «

W CO I— „ . -oS CD <*»

LU C/)

— 0

.E= 0 o w —1 CD

JC 0 Q_ CL JO O O O "O

0 CO 3 "U .£? o yu LL CO ̂ 3

Page 144: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

126

(a) TEM, Cu3Sn composite, as-soldered, low magnification

Figure 4.8. TEM micrograph of the as-soldered Cu3Sn composite solder/copper

joint, (a) low magnification and (b) higher magnification. (A) Cu substrate, (B)

Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich phase.

Page 145: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

127

a s s y s s a

(b) TEM, Cu3Sn composite, as-soldered, higher magnification

Page 146: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

128

(a) TEM, Cu6Sn5 composite, as-soldered, low magnification

Figure 4.9. TEM micrograph of the as-soldered Cu6Sn5 composite solder/copper

joint, (a) low magnification and (b) higher magnification. (A) Cu substrate, (B)

Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich phase.

Page 147: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

129

(b) TEM, Cu6Sn5 composite, as-soldered, higher magnification

Page 148: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

130

«

Figure 4.10. TEM micrograph of the as-soldered Cu composite solder/copper

joint. (A) Cu substrate, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5< (D) Pb-rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich

phase.

Page 149: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

131

2

hi frj "Ji WW,

Mum J';,- •' /I;. ; :w'y my/

Figure 4.11. TEM micrograph of the as-soldered Ag composite solder/copper

joint. (A) Cu substrate, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich

phase.

Page 150: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

132

'¥ # v f / ; * q f . / M

d ?.. u'fzvfr&i

Figure 4.12. TEM micrograph of the as-soldered Au composite solder/copper

joint. (A) Cu substrate, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich

phase.

Page 151: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

133

r J %

Figure 4.13. TEM micrograph of the as-soldered Ni composite solder/copper

joint. (A) Cu substrate, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich phase.

Page 152: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

134

mKMMm •Vt l ; ,if' I ih'rJ . > , \ \ I- • . - 1 , X f | ? J ; i . ! . - 1 | i I . .V J t / ' J>i •', •

:4 ii* h : u - v ;

Bjgj NMjfl SB g l | j | &p g l | j | Tp

| S H jKK SgijS

j, % ?, 1 J #

> ; r \

i :!• I *•> -* yli *d-i 1-5 ! r " « f i*

[ . L ; - \ l p , v > ? i , r

I • ! v p\ :• - !>

| i 1 : ' I ,4 • ' - r "i i 4 • > '%

> .. . i ' -

« f ; ' l | - * *, ,1 * f f «= ,- -a

Cu6Sn5/Cu3Sn interface

Figure 4.14. TEM micrograph of Cu composite solder/copper joint after

annealing at 140°C for 4 days. (A) Cu substrate, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-

rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich phase.

Page 153: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

135

Cu6Sn5/Cu3Sni interface

m

i

S s f i

Figure 4.15. TEM micrograph of Cu3Sn composite solder/copper joint after

annealing at 140°C for 4 days. (A) Cu substrate, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-

rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich phase.

Page 154: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

136

t i : - - j : i f , . ? : ; i f

- 7 * 1 _ J

f

r ,r J i ft ,7. i G*=.J # l i \ . f t •,.?r/:;.?r. "•?

>. * H ^ *" J* ». * ̂ '*:-' "i' l i fF<

% r J ? - v i j j * M > I ' U f c - M k w

i?U i

.•'/J- | Z1 . f

•Z '* ,

J1

S H t j r | | | fe—jg - -

f - c . _ ^ • Vvr,

Figure 4.16. TEM micrograph of Ag composite solder/copper joint after

annealing at 140°C for 4 days. (A) Cu substrate, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-

rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich phase.

Page 155: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

137

m

J

Figure 4.17. TEM micrograph of Ni composite solder/copper joint after

annealing at 140°C for 8 days. (A) Cu substrate, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5> (D) Pb-

rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich phase.

Page 156: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

138

J f Z J I J 2 S ! t r *

microvoids

Figure 4.18. SEM micrograph of Au composite solder/copper joint after

annealing at 120°C for 64 days. Microvoids are present along the

intermetallic/copper substrate interface (indicated by the arrors). The Cu3Sn is

partially transformed to Cu6Sn5. (A) Cu substrate, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D)

Pb-rich phase, and (E) Sn-rich phase.

Page 157: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

139

IB

(a) 120°C, 32 days

Figure 4.19. SEM micrographs of a Ni composite solder/copper joint, (a)

annealed at 120°C for 32 days and (b) annealed at 160°C for 16 days. (A) Cu

substrate, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-rich phase, (E) Sn-rich phase, (F) voids,

(G) Ni, and (H) Ni3Sn4.

Page 158: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

140

(b) 160°C, 16 days

Page 159: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

141

8

E 3 CO CO 0 c o 'sz

D(Cu6Sn5) = 3.98 x 10"1 cm 2/s

D(Cu3Sn) = 1.49x10~1/bm /s

500 1000 1500 2000 2500

Square Root of Annealing Time (sec1/2)

3000

Figure 4.20 Intermetallic thicknesses at the solder/copper interface versus the

square root of aging time for eutectic solder at 140°C. The slope of the line is

the square root of the diffusion coefficient.

Page 160: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

142

E 3

D(CueSn^ = 2.09 x 101 cm2/s

D(CUjjSn) = 0.90 x 1014cm2/s

500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

Square Root of Annealing Time (sec1/2)

Figure 4.21 Intermetallic thicknesses at the solder/copper interface versus the

square root of aging time for Cu composite solder at 120°C. The slope of the

line is the square root of the diffusion coefficient.

Page 161: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

143

-27

- 2 8

-29

-30

£ -31

-32

-33

-34

-

\ ^ G K C u 6 S n 5 ) = 1.0eV/atom . o

°

-

- Q(Cu3Sn) = 0.96 eV/atom

I I •

I 2.3 2.4 2.5

1/T (x 1000)

2.6

Figure 4.22 Plots of ln(D) versus 1/T for Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn formation at the

solder/copper substrate interface of Cu composite solder. The slope of the line

is the activation energy.

Page 162: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

144

Q c

Q(Cu6Sn5) = 0.65 eV/atom

Q(Cu3Sn) = 0.85 eV/atom

2.4 2.5

1/T (x 1000)

Figure 4.23 Plots of ln(D) versus 1/T for Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn formation at the

solder/copper substrate interface of Au composite solder. The slope of the line

is the activation energy.

Page 163: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

145

(a) Cu

Figure 4.24. TEM micrographs of (a) Cu, (b) Sn, (c) Ni, (d) Ag, and (e) Au thin

films. The morphologies for each element are different.

Page 164: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

146

(b) Sn

(c) Ni

Page 165: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

147

(d) Ag

(e) Au

Page 166: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

148

r * JPf

&itmm

(a) unaged

Figure 4.25. A time series of TEM micrographs of Sn islands on a continuous

Cu layer showing the Cu-Sn intermetallic growth, (a) unaged, (b) 250°C for 9

min, (c) 250°C for 18 min, (d) 250°C for 31 min, (e) 250°C for 32 min,

followed by at 200°C for 72 min, (f) 250°C for 32 min, followed by at 200°C

for 286 min, (g) 250°C for 32 min, followed by at 200°C for 703 min.

Page 167: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

149

(b) 250°C, 9 min

Page 168: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

150

(c) 250°C, 18 min

Page 169: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

151

£

(d) 250°C, 31 min

Page 170: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

152

(e) 250°C, 32 min + 200°C, 72 min

Page 171: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

153

(f) 250°C, 32 min + 200°C, 286 min

Page 172: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

154

(g) 250°C, 32 min + 200°C, 703 min

Page 173: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

155

Sill

Figure 4.26. TEM micrograph of the Cu/Sn/Ni sample showing no intermetallic

growth after annealing at 250°C for 2 hours, followed by 200°C for 12 hours.

Ni was detected at the Sn/Cu interface. 1, 2 and 3 are the probe positions for

XEDS analysis.

Page 174: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

156

0.2 c

CO

o

o o +5 CO

0) c £ (0 c

(0 a> a

0.1

Cu side interface 1 probe position

Figure 4.27. XEDS peak intensity ratios of Ni to Sn for the Cu/Sn/Ni sample.

Page 175: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

t = 0

solder

Cu substrate

157

1 l<_ Cu3Sn

t > 0

solder

wmm

iau

CugSri

Cu substrate

Figure 4.28. Model for the growth of the two interfacial intermetallics.

Page 176: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

158

E

(A <0 <D C

o

Cu3Sn Cu^n, Cu eutectic Au Ag

• CUgSn » C u ^ S n 5

Figure 4.29. The thicknesses of the iritermetallic layers at the solder/copper

substrate interface for eutectic solder and all composite solders in the as-

soldered condition.

Page 177: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

159

8

E

<ft <0 d) c o

CU3S11 Cu6Sn5 Cu Fe eutectic Au Ag

•Cu3Sn flCueSns

Figure 4.30. The thicknesses of the intermetallic layers at the solder/copper

substrate interface for eutectic solder and all composite solders after annealing

at 140°C for 16 days. (Note scale change from Figure 4.29.)

Page 178: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

160

Figure 4.31. TEM micrograph of the matrix of Au composite solder after

annealing at 140°C for 4 days. The AuSn4/AuSn4 grain boundary is labeled as

1 and AuSn4/Sn phase boundary is labeled as 2. (D) Pb-rich phase, (E) Sn-rich

phase and (F) AuSn4.

Page 179: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

161

< o c

CO

o o CO cn

(O c a>

CO Q LU X

0

^ / Valong boundary /

—9T . _

I I

within AuSn4

i i i i i i I 4 5 6 7 8

Measurement Number

10 11

Figure 4.32. XEDS peak intensity ratio of Sn to Au along an AuSn4/AuSn4 grain

boundary and an AuSn4/Au phase boundary compared to the ratio within the

AuSn4.

Page 180: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

162

Figure 4.33. SEM micrograph of 4 wt% Fe composite solder/copper joint

annealed at 140°C for 4 days. Compare Figure 4.33 and Figure 4.2b. There are

two intermetallics at the solder/copper interface in both micrographs. The Cu

particles are surrounded by Cu-Sn intermetallic. The Fe particles are surrounded

by Fe-Sn intermetallic. (A) Cu, (B) Cu3Sn, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-rich, (E) Sn-rich

and (F) Fe.

Page 181: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

163

Figure 4.34. SEM micrograph of 4 wt% Pd composite solder/copper joint

annealed at 140°C for 16 days. Compare Figure 4.34 and Figure 4.4h. There

is no Cu3Sn layer and voids occur at the solder/copper interface in both

samples. (A) Cu, (C) Cu6Sn5, (D) Pb-rich, (E) Sn-rich (F) voids, and (G) Pd-Sn

intermetallic.

Page 182: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

CHAPTER 4 REFERENCES

1. D.S. Dunn, T.F. Marinis, W.M. Sherry and C.J. Williams, Mat. Res. Soc.

Symp. Proc. 40, 129 (1985).

2. P.E. Davis, M.E. Warwick and S.J. Muckett, Plating and Surface

Finishing, 70, 49 (1983).

3. Elemental and Interplanar Spacing Index, (U.S. Department of Commerce,

NIST and JCPDS International Center for Diffraction Data, 1989).

4. W.G. Bader, Welding Journal, 54, 370s (1975).

5. P.E. Davis, M.E. Warwick and S.J. Muckett, Plating and Surface

Finishing, 70, 49 (1983).

6. K.N. Tu, Acta Met., 21, 347 (1973).

7. D.A. Unsworth and C.A Mackay, Trans. Insts. Metal Finishing, 51, 85

(1973).

8. M.E. Warwick and S.J. Muckett, Circuit World, 9, 5 (1983).

9. E.G. Jacobs, L.A. Foster, Y. Wu, A.R. Wilson and R.F. Pinizzotto, J.

Mater. Res. 8, 87 (1993).

10. T. Malis and D. Steele, Mat. Res. Soc. Symp. Proc., 254, 257 (1992).

11. 0 .0 . Popoola, J.J. Copper, B.P. Jakstys and W.M. Kriven, Mat. Res.

Soc. Symp. Proc., 254, 271 (1992).

12. G.L. Lucey, J.L. Marshall, C. Handwerker, D. Tench and A. Sunwoo,

Proc. NEPCON WEST '91, 1, 3 (1991).

164

Page 183: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

165

13. D.S. Dunn, T.F. Marinis, W.M. Sherry and C.J. Williams, Mat. Res. Soc.

Symp. Proc., 40, 129 (1985).

14. R.J.K. Wassink, Soldering in Electronics, 2nd Ed., (Electrochemical

Publications, Ltd., Scotland, 1989), Chapter 4.

15. K.N. Tu and R.D. Thompson, Acta Met., 30, 947 (1982).

16. P.W. Dehaven, Mat. Res. Soc. Symp. Proc., 40, 123 (1985).

17. P.J. Kay and C.A. Mackay, Trans. Inst. Metal Finishing, 54, 68 (1976).

18. W. G Bader, Welding Journal, 48, 551s (1969).

19. M. Omishi and A. Fujibuchi, Trans. JIM, 16, 539 (1972).

20. H. Oikawa and A. Hosoi, Scripta. Met., 9, 823 (1975).

21. P.J. Kay and C.A. Mackay, Trans. Inst. Metal Finishing, 57, 169 (1979).

22. D.C. Dufner, "Imaging of Chemical Reactions in Binary Alloys by High-

Resolution TEM", Presented at the Texas Society for Electron

Microscopy Symposium, San Marcos, TX, March 27, 1992.

23. C. Pouraghabagher, E.G Jacobs and R.F. Pinizzotto, "In situ

Transmission Electron Microscopy of Sn/Cu Intermetallic Formation",

Presented at the Texas Society for Electron Microscopy Symposium,

Austin, TX, October 22, 1992.

24. H.N. Keller, IEEE Trans. CHMT, 9, 433 (1986).

25. S. Nakahara, R.J. McCoy, L. Buene and J.M. Vandenberg, Thin Solid

Films, 84, 185 (1981).

26. B.F. Dyson, J. Appl. Phys. 37, 2375 (1966).

27. D.C. Yeh and H.B. Huntington, Phys. Rev. Lett., 53, 1469 1984.

Page 184: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

166

28. L. Buene, H. Falkenberg-Arell and J. Tafto, Thin Solid Films, 65, 247

(1980).

29. S. Nakahara, R.J. McCoy, L. Buene and J.M. Vandenberg, Thin Solid

Films, 84, 185 (1981).

30. Metals Handbook 8th Ed., Vol. 8, Metallograph, Structures and Phase

Diagrams, (American Society for Metals, Metala Park, OH, 1973).

Page 185: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

CHAPTER 5

THE MATRIX OF

EUTECTIC AND COMPOSITE SOLDERS

5.1 Introduction

The reliability of solder joints often depends directly on the mechanical

properties of the solder alloy. The mechanical properties of metals and alloys

depend on their microstructures and solder alloys are no exception. The

behavior of solder alloys is complex because unlike most structural alloys, they

are used at such high temperature relative to the melting temperature that the

microstructures change and evolve during service. Application conditions that

involve thermal cycling may produce cyclic microstructural evolution, depending

on the temperatures and frequencies involved.

The elements of the microstructure that are typically important are the

grain size and shape, the spacing of second phase particles, and the dislocation

density. In eutectic solders the grain size and the second-phase size and

spacing are directly related because at least two phases are always present. In

this chapter, the as-soldered eutectic and composite solder microstructures and

their evolution during annealing are reported. The study concentrates on a

fundamental understanding of the microstructure of the solder matrix and its

dependence on processing, solidification and annealing. The particles in the

composite solder matrix, their reaction with the solder, and their effect on Sn

diffusion are also discussed.

167

Page 186: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

168

The samples were prepared as described in Chapter 3. The standard

solidification cooling rate is the same for all samples, and is the same as that

used in the study of intermetallic layers at the solder/copper substrate interface.

The relationship of the matrix microstructure of as-soldered eutectic solder

samples with the cooling rate was also examined.

5.2 The Microstructure of Eutectic Solder

SEM and TEM micrographs of the eutectic solder matrix in the as-

soldered state are shown in Figure 5.1. The eutectic solder consists of two

phases. In the SEM micrograph*of Figure 5.1a, the Sn-rich phase appears dark

and the Pb-rich phase appears light. The matrix has a uniform globular

microstructure and does not show a lamellar or colony structure. The volume

ratio of the Pb-rich phase to Sn-rich in the eutectic 63Sn/37Pb solder is about

27:73.1 In the TEM micrograph of Figure 5.1b, the darker contrast Pb-rich

phase completely resides within the Sn-rich phase. Upon solidification at the

eutectic temperature, 19 wt% Sn is soluble in the Pb-rich phase2,3 and 2.5 wt%

Pb is soluble in the Sn-rich phase.4 On cooling to room temperature the

solubility drops to about 1 wt% Sn5 and less than 0.4 wt% Pb6 in the Pb-rich

phase and Sn-rich phase, respectively. The microstructure of eutectic solder is

highly dependent on the processing the alloy has received.7 The relationship

between the microstructure and the solidification cooling rate of eutectic solder

will be discussed in next section. At the standard cooling rate used throughout

the work, the typical microstructure is as in Figure 5.1. The selected area

diffraction pattern (SADP) of these phases are shown in Figure 5.2. The d-

spacings of the SADPs in Figures 5.2a and 5.2b match the d-spacing values

Page 187: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

169

given in the literature8 to within 1 % for fcc-Pb and /?-Sn, respectively. These

phase identifications were also verified using x-ray energy dispersive

spectroscopy (XEDS) in both SEM and STEM modes. In contrast to the results

of Frear et al.9,10 the Sn was not found to precipitate out in the Pb-rich regions

of the matrix.

The microstructure of a two-phase alloy is unstable if the total interfacial

free energy is not minimized. If the alloy is held at a temperature where

diffusion can occur, small particles will coarsen into larger particles with a

smaller total interfacial area through a continuous, diffusion-controlled process.

However, such coarsening often produces undesirable degradation of

mechanical properties such as strength.11 As with grain growth, the rate of

coarsening increases with temperature and is of particular concern in the design

of materials for high temperature applications.

The effect of anneal time and temperature on coarsening of eutectic

solder was studied using both SEM and TEM. Figure 5.3 shows the matrix of

eutectic solder after annealing at 140°C for 8 days. The grains in the Sn-rich

region can be distinguished easily and each Pb-rich region appears to be a

single grain. While Sn-rich grains are regular in shape, the Pb-rich phase

becomes elongated and more irregular with annealing. Comparing Figures 5.1a

and 5.3, it is clear that the grain size increases with annealing. The average

grain sizes for the Sn-rich and Pb-rich regions increase from 0.5 fxm and 1 jum

in the as-soldered state to 1 jum and 3 jinn after annealing at 140°C for 8 days.

Figure 5.4 shows the average grain size of the Pb-rich phase as a function of

annealing time at 140°C.

For the as-soldered eutectic solder sample, a phase with bright contrast,

Page 188: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

170

as shown in Figure 5.5a, was observed using TEM. The SADP of this phase is

shown in Figure 5.5b. XEDS spectra verify that this phase contains Pb. The

SADP in Figure 5.5b is characterized by broad rings. Ring broadening is typical

of amorphous or nanocrystalline materials. It is a totally unexpected result to

find an amorphous Pb-rich phase, because both the Pb-rich and Sn-rich phases

must solidify from the liquid as the sample cools. Since XEDS used here cannot

detect light elements (Z < Na), it cannot distinguish between metallic Pb and

Pb oxides. To identify the amorphous phase, eutectic solder samples in the as-

soldered state were sent to Oakridge National Laboratory and analyzed by Dr.

Mary McGivers using electron energy loss spectrascopy which can detect 0 .

The results showed that the amorphous areas are much thinner than the non-

amorphous areas (Sn-rich phase and crystalline Pb-rich phase), and contain lead

and oxygen. The existance of the very thin Pb oxide phase may due to

preferential removal of the Pb during the TEM sample preparation process of

ultramicrotomy, followed by the oxidation of the remaining thin Pb phase.

Alternatively, the Pb-rich phase may be totally removed from the sample leaving

the native PbO behind. To exam whether or not the Pb-rich phase can oxidize

easily, as-soldered eutectic solder samples were also prepared by

electropolishing and mechanical polishing followed by ion milling. Although the

quality of the samples prepared using these techniques were not as good as

those prepared by ultramicrotomy, broad ring diffraction patterns were still

obtained. These results confirmed that the Pb-rich phase can be oxidized very

easily.

Page 189: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

171

5.3 Eutectic Microstructures in the as-Soldered State

A central principle of materials science states that a material's properties

originate not only from its atomic composition but also from the atomic

arrangements within the material i.e. the material microstructure. However, for

a material of a given chemical composition, the microstructure is not static but

can vary greatly with its processing history. In the case of solder, the

application dictates its use in the as-soldered state, and hence, the cooling rate

of the alloy is the primary processing parameter. The local cooling rates of a

solder joint depend on many factors, including the soldering process, the

specific solder joint thickness and geometry, the composition and configuration

of the carrier board, and the neighboring components.11 To understand the

effect of cooling rate on solder joint microstructure, the microstructures of

samples with a simple configuration of copper/eutectic solder/copper with

different cooling rates (described in Chapter 3) were studied.

In the case of the fastest cooling rate, there is preferentially oriented,

plane-front, steady-state growth. The eutectic Sn/Pb solder grows as

alternating lamellae of the two constituent phases parallel to the direction of

growth. Eutectic solidification is a cooperative growth process since the solute

rejected ahead of one phase region becomes immediately incorporated as the

solvent phase in the adjacent region, and the planes thus grow at the same

rate.11 Many lamellae constitute a lamellar grain. They will continue to grow in

a coupled manner until they contact an external interface or a similar grain. The

eutectic lamellar microstructure is shown in Figure 5.6. The lamellar spacing

within the eutectic grain is determined by the cooling rate. A fast cooling rate

results in fine lamellae. For a multigrained structure, the eutectic grains will be

Page 190: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

172

smaller and the lamellar spacing within each grain will be finer with faster

cooling rates.12,13,14 The important microstructural parameters in this structure

are the eutectic grain size and the internal fine phase structure.

With this morphology, many individual phase regions, i.e., the lamellae,

constitute a single eutectic grain. Within a eutectic grain, all regions of the

same phase exhibit a single constant crystallographic orientation, and there is

a unique preferred crystallographic interface plane between the two constituent

phases.14,15,16,17,18 The lamellar grain described above is composed, in fact, of

single crystallites of the two constituent phases.18,19,20,21 The crystallographic

relationships for the two phases minimize the growth and interfacial energies

for a given set of solidification conditions. The stability of the liquid-solid

interface determines the inter- and intraphase crystallographic and

morphological perfection.15,16,17,18

A breakdown of the lamellar structure results from instabilities in the

advancing liquid-solid interface. The resultant morphology may be rod-like, or

globular (degenerate lamellar). It lacks the long-range perfection of the regular

lamellar structure.17 Interface instabilities arise from growth along unfavorably

oriented growth directions, local supercooling effects, etc.16,17,18 Solidification

under such conditions results in discontinuities and faults of the individual

phase regions and phase interfaces that disrupt the continued growth of the

aligned lamellar structure. Instead, as shown in Figure 5.7, only a short-range

phase alignment is maintained and a colony substructure develops within a

eutectic grain. A colony is a subset of a eutectic grain and is characterized as

a short-range phase alignment over a small region of the eutectic grain

separated from other eutectic colonies by a small crystallographic mismatch.11

Page 191: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

173

The colony structure lacks the structural perfection of the lamellar eutectic,

especially at the colony boundaries. However, it does maintain a special and

unique crystallographic alignment with the growth direction and, as much as

possible, between the two constituent phases.

A different microstructure is obtained for moderate cooling rate samples,

(Figure 5.1b). Eutectic colony formation is suppressed and the microstructure

consists of a dispersion of the Pb-rich phase in a Sn-rich matrix. The phase size

and shape distribution are uniform throughout the entire specimen. Unlike the

lamellar grain structure described above, there is no crystallographic relationship

between the two phases.

When the slowest solidification cooling rate is used, as described in

Chapter 3, the amorphous Pb oxide phases are observed. This implies that the

sample preparation artifact of Pb removal by ultramicrotomy occurs more easily

when the solder/copper joint solidifies slowly.

Describing a eutectic microstructure is not straightforward. Unlike a

single-phase material, grain size is not readily apparent. Much of the published

work on solder microstructures uses the phase diameter (i.e., the average

diameter of a phase region in a two dimensional section) as the grain size. The

phase diameter may not be a true grain at all. Figure 5.8 is a dark field image

of a moderate cooling rate sample. The Pb-rich regions are embedded within the

Sn-rich phase. By definition, a grain refers to an element of a material within

which a single crystallography exists. In a eutectic structure, many individual

phase regions may constitute a single "eutectic grain". The terms that apply to

eutectic microstructures include the eutectic grain, the eutectic colony, and the

individual phase regions. The eutectic grain refers to that portion of the

Page 192: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

174

structure that nucleated at a single site and that shares a specific and unique

crystallography. The eutectic colony may be a subset of a eutectic grain and

refers to a region within the microstructure where the phase particles have a

characteristic arrangement.12

The coarsening behavior of as-soldered eutectic solders varies

significantly with the various morphologies. The perfect lamellar structures

exhibit exceptionally high morphological stability at elevated temperatures.22,23

This contrasts greatly with the rapid coarsening of the more dispersed

structures and the irregularly shaped material which comprises the colony

boundaries. Coarsening always initiates in these less regular regions and very

slowly consumes the rest of the material. This is attributed to the higher

interfacial energies of the less favorably aligned structures and the enhanced

diffusion afforded by the greater fault and grain boundary areas.12

5.4 The Microstructures of Composite Solders

5.4.1 The Matrix of Cu-Containing Composite Solders

SEM microstructures of the Cu, Cu3Sn and Cu6Sn5 composite solder

matrices in the as-soldered state are shown in Figures 5.9a, 5.9b and 5.9c,

respectively. The copper particles (Figure 5.9a) and Cu3Sn particles (Figure

5.9b) are surrounded by a layer of Cu6Sn5. The TEM micrograph in Figure 5.10

shows the interfacial region between a copper particle and the solder of the Cu

composite solder in the as-solddred state. Similar to the interfacial layers

between the solder and copper substrate, two intermetallic layers, Cu3Sn and

Cu6Sn5, are visible between the copper particle and the solder matrix.

SEM microstructures of the Cu, Cu3Sn, and Cu6Sn5 composite solder

Page 193: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

175

matrix after annealing at 140°C for 16 days are shown in Figures 5.11a, 5.11b,

and 5.11c, respectively. With annealing, the Cu and Cu3Sn particles react with

Sn to form Cu-Sn intermetallics. If the anneal time is long enough and large

amounts of Sn are present (as is the case of the samples used in these

experiments), the particles completely transform to the thermodynamically

favored terminal phase Cu6Sn5. In the Cu composite solder, the thicknesses of

the intermetallics surrounding the Cu particles are relatively constant,

independent of the particle size. The intermetallic thicknesses were measured

using the same computerized digitization technique as used for measuring the

intermetallic thicknesses at the solder/copper substrate interfaces. Table 5.1

compares the thicknesses of the Cu3Sn and Cu6Sn5 layers around the copper

particles with the intermetallic thicknesses at the solder/copper substrate

interface for Cu composite solder annealed at 140°C. It was found that the

thicknesses of Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn at the solder/copper particle interface after

annealing at 140°C for 0 (the as-soldered state), 4, 8 and 16 days are larger

than the corresponding thicknesses at the solder/copper substrate interface.

Therefore, the diffusion coefficient is larger at the solder/copper particle

interface than at the solder/copper substrate interface. The diffusion of Sn

through Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn followed by reaction with Cu must occur for

intermetallic formation and growth to take place. Copper particles (or other

metallic/intermetallic particles) are distributed uniformly in the composite solder

matrix and are surrounded by the solder. The pathways for the Sn to diffuse to

the copper particles are shorter than to the solder/copper substrate interface.

Thus the Sn flux at the solder/copper particle interface is greater than at the

solder/copper substrate interface. This is consistent with the diffusion

Page 194: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

176

mechanism proposed for the formation and growth of Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn

interfacial layers presented in Chapter 4. Table 5.2 compares the thicknesses

of the Cu6Sn5 layer around the Cu3Sn particles with the Cu6Sn5 thicknesses

around the copper particles and at the solder/copper substrate interfaces for Cu

and Cu3Sn composite solders after annealing at 140°C. The thickness of the

Cu6Sn5 layer around the Cu3Sn particles is larger than that around the Cu

particles or at the solder/copper substrate interface. This is because of the Sn

reacts with the Cu3Sn phase directly and transforms it to Cu6Sn5. It is not

necessary to transform Cu to Cu3Sn first. This observationt is also consistent

with the proposed diffusion mechanism.

With annealing, the Cu particles react with the Sn. After the

consumption of all the Cu, the Sn reacts with Cu3Sn until it is all transformed

into Cu6Sn5. In the Cu3Sn composite solder, Cu3Sn reacts with the Sn to form

Cu6Sn5 directly. Both Cu and Cu3Sn particles act as Sn-sinks. They remove Sn

from the matrix which reduces the amount of Sn that diffuses to the

solder/substrate interface. This is one mechanism that causes the change in

activation energies for the formation of Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn at the solder/copper

substrate interface in Cu and Cu3Sn composite solders compared to the

eutectic solder alone.

Since Cu6Sn5 is the thermodynamically favored terminal phase, the

Cu6Sn5 particles in the Cu6Sn5 composite solder do not react with the Sn as the

Cu and Cu3Sn particles do. With annealing, the Cu6Sn5 particles remain the

same, as shown in Figures 5.9c and 5.11c, except possibly for a small amount

of coalescence. These Cu6Sn5 particles, therefore, do not react with Sn to any

appreciable extent. As discussed in Chapter 4, the Cu6Sn5/Cu6Sn5 grain

Page 195: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

177

boundaries (labeled 1 in Figure 5.12) and Cu6Sn5/Sn phase boundaries (labeled

2 in Figure 5.12) enhance the Sn diffusion in the solder matrix.

5.4.2 The Matrices of Au and Ag Composite Solders

Figures 5.13a and 5.13b are SEM micrographs of the Au composite

solder matrix in the as-soldered state and after annealing at 140°C for 16 days.

The gray contrast, needle-like structures are AuSn4 intermetallic. Dyson et

a l 24,25,26 studied the diffusion of noble metals in Sn and Pb, and found that Au

impurities diffuse rapidly in Sn by an interstitial mechanism. Since Sn self-

diffuses via vacancy diffusion, the diffusivities of Au diffusing in Sn and Sn

self-diffusion are very different. At 140°C, the Au diffusivity is on the order of

10"7 cm2/sec,24 while the diffusivity of Sn is on the order of 10"12 cm2/sec.27

During soldering Au rapidly diffuses through the solder matrix and reacts with

Sn to form AuSn4 intermetallic. In the as-soldered state, the Au particles have

completely transformed into AuSn4. AuSn4 phase is the terminal phase in this

system according to the Au-Sn phase diagram.28 With additional annealing, the

AuSn4 does not react with the Sn or Pb. As discussed in Chapter 4, XEDS in

STEM mode revealed that there were enhanced diffusion pathways for Sn along

the AuSn4/AuSn4 grain boundaries and AuSn4/Sn phase boundaries.

The matrices of the Ag composite solder in the as-soldered state and

after annealing at 140°C for 16 days are shown in Figures 5.14a and 5.14b.

The Ag particles react with Sn to form Ag3Sn intermetallic during the soldering

operation and with annealing. The rates for the formation of the Cu-Sn, Au-Sn

and Ag-Sn intermetallics are: Au-Sn > Ag-Sn > Cu-Sn. The Ag and Ag3Sn

particles have almost the same contrast in the SEM and can be distinguished

Page 196: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

178

only by XEDS analysis. In addition, the Ag and Ag3Sn particles appear similar

in the TEM, but have different SADPs. The particles shown in Figures 5.14a

and 5.14b are Ag and Ag3Sn. With annealing more and more Ag particles

transform into Ag3Sn.

5.4.3 The Matrix of the Ni Composite Solder

Figures 5.15a and 15b are SEM micrographs of the Ni composite solder

matrix in the as-soldered state and after annealing at 140°C for 16 days. In the

as-soldered state, the Ni particles are surrounded by a layer of Ni3Sn4. A TEM

micrograph of a Ni particle surrounded by Ni3Sn4 is shown in Figure 5.16. The

Ni3Sn4 phase was identified by XEDS in the SEM and by SADP in the TEM.

While the Ni3Sn4 layer in the as-soldered state is thicker than the Cu6Sn5 layer

surrounding the Cu particles in Cu composite solder (Figure 5.9a), the

subsequent growth of Ni3Sn4 around the Ni particles is similar to the growth of

Cu6Sn5 around the Cu particle. With soldering and annealing, the Ni reacts with

the Sn until the Ni transforms completely to the terminal phase Ni3Sn4. As

discussed in Chapter 4, during soldering Ni diffuses extreme quickly in Sn by

an interstitial mechanism29 to the solder/copper substrate interface and stays

there. This Ni barrier layer inhibits the Sn from reaching the copper substrate

and thus prevents the Sn from reacting with Cu to form Cu-Sn intermetallic.

5.4.4 The Pb-Rich and Sn-Rich Phases in Composite Solder

The metallic or intermetallic particles added to the composite solders are

distributed in the solder matrix and are imbedded in the Pb-rich and Sn-rich

regions. As shown in Figure 5.12, a TEM micrograph of the Cu6Sn5 composite

Page 197: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

179

solder matrix in the as-soldered state, the morphology and the size of the Pb-

rich and Sn-rich regions in composite solders are the same as in the eutectic

solder matrix. In as-soldered state, all the composite solder matrices have a

uniform globular microstructure (Figure 5.9, 5.13a, 5.14a and 5.15a), except

for Cu6Sn5 composite solder which has a two phase eutectic lamellar

microstructure due to a different local solidification cooling rate. The coarsening

behavior of the composite solder matrices are same as that of the eutectic

solder matrix. The coarsening rates are also similar. As shown in Figure 5.11,

5.13b, 5.14b and 5.15b, the sizes of the Pb-rich and Sn rich regions in

composite solders after annealing at 140°C for 16 days are not significantly

different for the in eutectic solder. In addition, precipitation of metallic or

intermetallic particles within the solder phases, or Sn precipitation within the

Pb-rich regions were not observed.

5.5 Summary and Conclusions of Chapter 5

The eutectic solder matrix consists of two phases, Pb-rich and Sn-rich.

The matrix has a uniform globular microstructure in the as-soldered state and

no precipitation was found within the Pb-rich or Sn-rich regions or along the

grain boundaries.

With high temperature and long time annealing, the two solder phases

coarsen. The sizes of the Pb-rich and Sn-rich regions increase with time, and

the rate of coarsening increases with temperature.

An amorphous Pb oxide phase was observed in the eutectic and

composite solder matrices. The existance of this phase may due to removal of

the Pb during the ultramicrotomy used for TEM sample preparation.

Page 198: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

180

The microstructure of solder matrix in the as-soldered state is related to

the solidification cooling rate. With faster cooling, the eutectic Sn/Pb solder

grows as alternating lamellae of the two constituent phases. With slower

cooling, the eutectic solder matrix forms a dispersion of Pb-rich regions in the

Sn-rich matrix. This microstructure is uniform in phase size and shape.

The Cu and Cu3Sn particles in the Cu and Cu3Sn composite solders react

with Sn until all Cu and Cu3Sn particles transform into the terminal phase

Cu6Sn5. The particles act as Sn-sinks which remove Sn from the solder. The

formation and growth of Cu-Sn intermetallics at the solder/copper particle

interface are similar to that at the solder/copper substrate interface.

Cu6Sn5 is the terminal intermetallic phase. Cu6Sn5 particles in the Cu6Sn5

composite solder do not react with the solder. The Cu6Sn5/Cu6Sn5 grain

boundaries and Cu6Sn5/Sn phase boundaries may enhance the Sn diffusion to

the solder/copper substrate interface.

Au diffuses rapidly in solder via an interstitial mechanism. During

soldering, all Au particles react completely with Sn and form the terminal

intermetallic phase AuSn4. The AuSn4/AuSn4 grain boundaries and AuSn4/Sn

phase boundaries act as enhanced diffusion pathways for Sn.

During soldering and with annealing, Ag reacts with Sn to form Ag3Sn

in Ag composite solder.

Ni can diffuse rapidly to the solder/copper substrate interface where it

acts as barrier layer and inhibits Sn diffusion. Ni also reacts with Sn to form

Ni3Sn4 in the Ni composite solder.

The morphology and the sizes of the Pb-rich and Sn-rich regions in the

composite solders are similar to those of the eutectic solder matrix. The

Page 199: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

181

coarsening behavior of the Pb-rich and Sn-rich phases are not affected by the

particle additions in the composite solders.

Page 200: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

182

Table 5.1. Thicknesses (ji/m) of Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn layers

at the Solder/Copper Particle Interface and Solder/Copper Substrate Interface

for 7.6 wt% Cu Composite Solder Annealed at 140°C

Intermetallic Position Anneal Time (days) Intermetallic Position

0 4 8 16

Cu6Sn5 around copper

particle

1.01 2.00 2.64 4.93 Cu6Sn5

at solder/copper

interface

0.96 1.64 2.19 3.61

Cu3Sn around copper

particle

0 1.83 2.20 2.83 Cu3Sn

at solder/copper

interface

0 0.82 1.37 2.46

Page 201: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

183

Table 5.2. Thicknesses (//m) of Cu6Sn5 Layers After Annealing at 140°C

Position Anneal Time (days) Position

0 4 8 16

around Cu3Sn particles 0.90 3.17 7.82 11.48

around Cu particles 1.01 2.00 2.64 4.93

at Cu3Sn composite solder/copper

substrate interface

0.98 1.65 2.23 2.58

at Cu composite solder/copper

substrate interface

0.96 1.64 2.19 3.61

Page 202: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

184

(a) SEM

Figure 5.1. (a) SEM and (b) TEM microstructures of the eutectic solder matrix

in the as-soldered state. (A) Pb-rich phase and (B) Sn-rich phase.

Page 203: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

185

(b) TEM

Page 204: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

186

(a) Pb-rich phase

(b) Sn-rich phase

Figure 5.2. Selected area diffraction patterns (SADP) of (a) Pb-rich phase and

(b) Sn-rich phase.

Page 205: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

187

Figure 5.3. SEM microstructure of the eutectic solder matrix after annealing at

140°C for 8 days. (A) Pb-rich phase and (B) Sn-rich phase.

Page 206: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

188

E 5

c o

" 5 > a> 2 4

sz o "C • JQ 0.

a> N CO

0 as-soldered 4 days 8 days

Anneal time

16 days

Figure 5.4. The size of the Pb-rich phase of eutectic solder as a function of

anneal time at 140°C.

Page 207: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

189

(a) TEM micrograph

(c) SADP

Figure 5.5. (a) TEM microstructure of eutectic solder matrix in the as-soldered

state shows the amorphous Pb oxide phase and (b) SADP of Pb oxide phase.

(A) Pb oxide phase and (B) Sn-rich phase.

Page 208: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

190

Figure 5.6. TEM microstructure of eutectic solder matrix after solidification with

fast cooling rate shows a highly lamellar structure. The dark regions are the Pb-

rich phase and the light regions are the Sn-rich phase.

Page 209: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

191

Figure 5.7. TEM microstructure of eutectic solder matrix after solidification with

fast cooling rate may show a colony structure. The dark regions are the Pb-rich

phase and the light regions are the Sn-rich phase.

Page 210: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

192

Figure 5.8. Dark field TEM micrograph of eutectic solder matrix after

solidification with moderate cooling rate. The Sn-rich grains are clearly visible.

Page 211: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

193

(a) Cu

Figure 5.9. SEM microstructures of (a) Cu, (b) Cu3Sn and (c) Cu6Sn5 composite

solder matrix in the as-soldered state. (A) Pb-rich phase, (B) Sn-rich phase, (C)

Cu, (D) Cu6Sn5 and (E) Cu3Sn.

Page 212: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

194

(b) CiuSn

(c) CugSrig

Page 213: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

195

Figure 5.10. TEM micrograph of Cu composite solder matrix in the as-soldered

state shows the a particle and surrounding Cu-Sn intermetallics.

Page 214: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

196

(a) Cu

Figure 5.11. SEM microstructures of (a) Cu, (b) Cu3Sn and (c) Cu6Sn5

composite solder matrix after annealing at 140°C for 16 days. (A) Pb-rich

phase, (B) Sn-rich phase, (C) Cu, (D) Cu6Sn5 and (E) Cu3Sn.

Page 215: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

197

(b) Cu3Sn

(c) CiigSrig

Page 216: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

198

m

Figure 5.12. TEM micrograph of Cu6Sn5 composite solder matrix in the as-

soldered state. Cu6Sn5/Cu6Sn5 grain boundaries (labeled with 1) and Cu6Sn5/Sn

phase boundaries (labeled with 2) are visible. (A) Pb oxide phase, (B) Sn-rich

phase and (C) Cu6Sn5 .

Page 217: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

199

— -r ̂ M St* -** ^

ft** c oJ0Jk

"K»Tk .*"1

(a) as-soldered

(b) 140°C, 16 days

Figure 5.13. SEM microstructure of Au composite solder matrix (a) as-soldered

arid (b) after annealing at 140°C for 16 days. (A) Pb-rich phase, (B) Sn-rich

phase and (C) AuSn4.

Page 218: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

200

(a) as-soldered

. I m

(b) 140°C, 16 days

Figure 5.14. SEM microstructure of Ag composite solder matrix (a) as-soldered

and (b) after annealing at 140°C for 16 days. (A) Pb-rich phase, (B) Sn-rich

phase, (C) Ag and (D) Ag3Sn.

Page 219: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

201

f« CSS t

(a) as-soldered

(b) 140°C, 16 days

Figure 5.15. SEM microstructure of Ni composite solder matrix (a) as-soldered

and (b) after annealing at 140°C for 16 days. (A) Pb-rich phase, (B) Sn-rich

phase, (C) Ni and (D) Ni3Sn4 phase.

Page 220: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

202

Figure 5.16. TEM micrograph of Ni composite solder matrix in the as-soldered

state showing a Ni particle and surrounding Ni3Sn4.

Page 221: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

CHAPTER 5 REFERENCES

1. Z. Mei and J.W. Morris, Jr., J. Elec. Mater., 21, 599 (1992).

2. D. Stockdale, J. Inst. Metals, 49, 267 (1932).

3. G. Borelius, Trans. AIME, 191, 477 (1951).

4. A. Stockburn, J. Inst. Metals, 66, 33 (1940).

5. I. Obinata and E. Schmid, Metallwirtschaft, 12, 101 (1933).

6. H.S. Kalish and F.J. Dunkerley, Trans. AIME, 180, 637 (1949).

7. W.A. Tiller, R. McDjenovich, J. Appl. Phys., 34, 3639 (1963).

8. Elemental and Interplannar Spacing Index, (U.S. Department of

Commerce, NIST and JCPDS International Center for Diffraction Data,

1989).

9. D.R. Frear, Ph.D. Dissertation, University of California, Berkeley, 1987.

10. D.R. Frear, J.B. Posthill and J.W. Morris, Jr., Metal. Trans. A, 20A,

1325 (1989).

11. J.W. Morris, Jr., D. Tribula, T.S.E. Summers and D. Grivas, Solder Joint

Reliability Theory and Application, J.H. Lau Eds., (Van Nostrand

Reinhold, New York, 1991), Chapter 7.

12. M. McLean, Directionally Solidified Eutectic, (The Metals Society,

London, 1983).

13. P.G. Shewmon, Transformations in Metals, (McGraw-Hill, New York,

1969).

203

Page 222: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

204

14. R. Elliott, Eutectic Solidification Processing, (Betterworths, London,

1983).

15. J.D. Verhoeven, D.P. Mourer and E.D. Gibson, Met. Trans. A, 8A, 1239

(1977).

16. J.D. Hunt, J. Inst. Met., 94, 125 (1964).

17. R.H. Hopkins and R.W. Kraft, Trans. AIME, 242, 1627 (1968).

18. B. Labulle and C. Petipas, J. Cryst. Growth, 28, 279 (1975).

19. M. Cagnon, M. Suery, A. Eberhardt and B. Baudelet, Acta Met. 25, 71

(1977).

20. J.P. Chilton and W.C. Winegard, J. Inst. Met., 89, 162 (1960).

21. H.W. Weart and D.J. Mack, Trans. Met. Soc. AIME, 10, 664 (1958).

22. B.P. Kashyap and G.S. Murty, Mat. Sci. & Eng., 50, 205 (1981).

23. M. Frebel and B. Otte, Scripta Met., 9, 1317 (1975).

24. B.F. Dyson, J. Appl. Phys., 37, 2375 (1966).

25. B.F. Dyson, T.R. Anthony and D. Turnbull, J. Appl. Phys. 38, 3408

(1967).

26. B.F. Dyson, T.R. Anthony and D. Turnbull, J. Appl. Phys. 37, 2370

(1966).

27. J.D. Meakin and E. Klokholm, Trans. AIME, 218, 463 (1960).

28. M. Hansen and K. Anderko, Constitution of Binary Alloys, 2nd Ed.,

(McGraw-Hill, New York, 1958), p.232.

29. D.C. Yeh and H.B. Huntington, Phys. Rev. Lett., 53, 1469 (1984).

Page 223: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

CHAPTER 6

SUMMARY

In this dissertation, the studies of diffusion kinetics and microstructures

of eutectic and composite solder/copper joints were described in detail. Sn/Pb

solders are widely used by the electronics industry to provide both mechanical

and electrical connections within and among the different packaging levels in

an electronic system. In an effort to improve the mechanical properties of

solder, metallic and intermetallic particles were added to a eutectic solder

matrix to form composite solders. When solder reacts with the copper

substrate, the intermetallics Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn form and grow at the

solder/copper interface. The formation and growth of these intermetallics have

been proposed as controlling mechanisms for solderability and reliability of

solder/copper joints. It is important to investigate the kinetics and

microstructures of the new composite solder/copper joints and to understand

the mechanisms behind the experimental results, which could lead to better

control of the solderability and reliability.

Scanning electron microscopy (SEM), transmission electron microscopy

(TEM), x-ray energy dispersive spectroscopy (XEDS) and scanning transmission

electron microscopy (STEM) were used to examine the microstructures of

solder/copper joints. Samples used for SEM examination were prepared using

standard metallurgical sample preparation techniques with careful control of the

polishing conditions. Ultramicrotomy was the primary TEM sample preparation

205

Page 224: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

206

technique developed during this project.

The diffusion kinetics and microstructures of six types of composite

solder/copper joints were studied. These composite solders are: 7.6 w t % Cu,

20 w t% Cu6Sn5, 20 w t% Cu3Snf 4 w t% Au, 4 w t% Ag and 4 w t % Ni. The

growth and morphology of the intermetallic phases at the composite

solder/copper substrate interface were examined as functions of time,

temperature and particle additions. The activation energies for the formation of

Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn at the interface were determined for these composite

solders, and were compared to the published values for the eutectic

solder/copper system. The microstructures and the anneal behavior of the

eutectic solder and composite solder matrix were studied. The effect of the

particle additions on the diffusion behavior of Sn in the composite solder matrix

and thus on the microstructures of the intermetallic interface were also

examined.

Conclusions from this work are:

1. During soldering, both Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn form at the solder/copper

substrate interface. The rj-phase Cu6Sn5 forms adjacent to the solder and

the e-phase Cu3Sn is adjacent to the copper substrate. Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn

both increase in thickness with increasing anneal time and temperature.

2. The activation energies for the formation of Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn at the

eutectic solder and six types of composite solder/copper substrate

interfaces were determined.

3. The addition of particles to eutectic solder strongly affects the

microstructure and kinetics of the interfacial intermetallic layers at the

solder/copper substrate interface. Compared to the activation energy for

Page 225: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

207

Cu6Sn5 formation (0.84 eV) and Cu3Sn formation (1.63 eV) for the

eutectic solder alone:

(1) Cu-containing particle additions (Cu, Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn) reduce

the thickness of the Cu6Sn5 and increase the thickness of the

Cu3Sn. They increase the activation energy for Cu6Sn5 formation

and decrease the activation energy for Cu3Sn formation.

(2) Au and Ag particles decrease the activation energies for both

Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn formation.

(3) Ni particle additions drastically increase the activation energy for

Cu6Sn5 formation. Cu3Sn formation is suppressed. Its thickness is

reduced to almost zero. The Cu6Sn5 layer contains a substantial

volume fraction of voids adjacent to the copper substrate.

TEM was used to investigate the nanostructure of the eutectic and

composite solder/copper systems and the interfacial relationships among

the different phases.

(1) Ultramicrotomy was successfully used to section thin slices of

solder/copper joints in cross-section for TEM analysis. For the first

time, the Pb-rich and Sn-rich phases of the solder, the copper

substrate, the particles in the composite solders, and the metallic

and intermetallic interfacial layers were observed and analyzed by

TEM in a single sample.

(2) The e -phase Cu3Sn has a columnar morphology while the tj-phase

Cu6Sn5 has a rod faceted morphology. The grain size of the

Cu6Sn5 phase is larger than that of the Cu3Sn phase.

(3) Cu3Sn was observable at the solder/copper interface in as-

Page 226: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

208

soldered samples only by using TEM. It was not observable using

SEM.

5. Thin film samples were annealed in the TEM in-situ using a hot stage,

and were observed in real-time to determine the mechanisms of

intermetallic formation at the solder/copper interface and the effect of

particle additions on the intermetallic growth.

(1) For the Cu/Sn thin films, intermetallic formation begins at the

Sn/Cu boundary and progresses laterally from the Sn into the Cu.

(2) For the Cu/Sn/Ni thin films, Ni acts as a barrier which prevents Sn

from diffusing into Cu, thus inhibiting Cu-Sn intermetallic

formation.

6. The eutectic solder matrix consists of two phases, Pb-rich and Sn-rich.

(1) The eutectic solder matrix has a uniform globular microstructure

in the as-soldered state. With annealing, the two solder phases

coarsen.

(2) The microstructure of solder matrix in the as-soldered state is

related to the solidification cooling rate. With fast cooling,

alternating lamellae of the two constituent phases are formed.

With slow cooling, the eutectic solder matrix is a dispersion of Pb-

rich region in a Sn-rich matrix.

7. For the particles added to the solder matrix:

(1) Cu and Cu3Sn particles react with Sn until all Cu and Cu3Sn

transform to the terminal phase, Cu6Sn5. These particles act as

Sn-sinks which remove Sn from the solder.

(2) Cu6Sn5 particles do not react with the solder. The Cu6Sn5/Sn

Page 227: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

209

phase boundaries and Cu6Sn5/Cu6Sn5 grain boundaries enhance

the Sn diffusion to the solder/copper substrate interface.

(3) Au diffuses rapidly in the solder via an interstitial mechanism.

During soldering, all the Au particles react completely with the Sn

to form the terminal phase AuSn4. The AuSn4/Sn phase

boundaries and AuSn4/AuSn4 grain boundaries act as enhanced

diffusion pathways for Sn.

(4) During soldering and with annealing, the Ag particles react with

the Sn to form Ag3Sn.

(5) Ni can diffuse rapidly to the solder/copper substrate interface and

act as a barrier layer to inhibit Sn diffusion. Ni also reacts with the

Sn to form Ni3Sn4.

8. Based on the SEM and TEM studies, and in-situ TEM thin film

observations, a Sn diffusion model and Sn diffusion mechanisms in

composite solders were proposed.

(1) The growth of Cu-Sn intermetallics at the solder/copper substrate

interface requires the diffusion of Sn through Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn

followed by reaction with Cu; Cu does not diffuse into the solder

to any appreciable extent.

(2) There are two mechanisms which explain the effects of the

particle additions on the kinetics of intermetallic formation. First,

the grain boundaries of the intermetallic particles and the

intermetallic particle/Sn phase boundaries in the solder matrix act

as enhanced diffusion pathways for Sn, thus increasing the flux

of Sn to the solder/copper substrate interface. Second, the Cu,

Page 228: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

210

Cu3Sn and Ag particles act as Sn-sinks which remove Sn from the

solder and decrease the amount of Sn available for reaction at the

solder/substrate interface.

(3) Ni is an extremely effective diffusion barrier which completely

prevents Sn from diffusing into the copper substrate.

Page 229: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

APPENDIX A

CRYSTAL STRUCTURES

211

Page 230: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

212

This appendix describes the crystal structures of the metals and

intermetallics discussed in this study.

Metals usually have one of the three basic crystal structures: face-

centered cubic (fee) (Strukturbericht A1), body-centered cubic (bcc)

(Strukturbericht A2), or closed-packed hexagonal (cph) (Strukturbericht A3).

These forms result from simple ways of packing spheres. Figure A.1 illustrates

the unit cells in perspective with the atomic positions indicated by spheres.1

The shadowed planes are the closest-packed planes. In the fee and cph

structures, the coordination number is 12, each atom being surrounded by 12

nearest neighbors at a distance &/2H = 0.707a in fee (where a is the length

of the cube edge), and a distance of a in cph (where a is the length of the edge

of the hexagon). In the bcc structure the coordination number is 8, with 8

nearest neighbors at a distance ah/3/2 = 0.866a (where a is the length of the

cube edge), and with an additional 6 next nearest neighbors at a distance a.

The electron diffraction pattern from a specific region of a specimen

viewed in the transmission electron microscope (TEM) is known as a Selected

Area Diffraction Pattern (SADP). SADPs are routinely used for phase

identification. The SADP on the final viewing screen is the magnified image of

the back focal plane of the objective lens. The magnification factor is defined

as an equivalent camera length that would be necessary to produce the same

magnification in a diffraction camera without the lenses. This is shown

schematically in Figure A.2 using reflection from crystal planes at a Bragg angle

9 to generate a diffracted beam.2 As discussed by J.W. Edington,2 if the

distance from the transmitted to the diffracted spot is R, and the camera length

is L:

Page 231: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

213

Rd = XL (A.1)

where XL is the camera constant which describes the magnification of the

diffraction pattern. The distance R in the SADP is characteristic of the

interplanar spacing d(hk)) of the reflecting plane and the camera constant. After

obtaining a SADP, the interplanar spacing (d-spacing) is calculated by:

d = (A.2) R

The interplanar spacings, d(hk„, may be used for phase identification using the

data compiled by the International Center for Diffraction Data.3

The crystal structure of Pb is fee with a = 4.9502 A (where a is the

length of the cube edge as shown in Figure A. 1a).4 Sn has two possible

phases: grey a-Sn and white /?-Sn. Grey Sn is cubic and is the low temperature

phase. It was not observed in this study. (According to the equilibrium phase

diagram cr-Sn should form below 13°C in pure Sn, but this transformation is

greatly inhibited by the presence of Pb or Sb in Sn alloys.) /?-Sn, as shown in

Figure A.3, has a body-centered tetragonal structure with 2 atoms per unit cell

and a = 5.8315 A, c = 3.1814 A.4 Tables A.1 and A.2 show the lattice

spacings and indexed planes for Pb and /?-Sn.

The d-spacings in Tables A.1 to A.3, and the calculated d-spacings in

Tables A.4 to A.8 are calculated values using the lattice parameters and the

crystallographic formulae for interplanar spacings given by J.W. Edington.5 The

handbook values of the d-spacings in Tables A.4 to A.7 are the d-spacings

published by the International Center for Diffraction Data.3 The experimental

values of the d-spacings in Tables A.4 to A.8 were calculated from data

Page 232: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

214

obtained during this project.

The crystal structures of Cu, Ag, Au, and Ni are all face-centered cubic.

Table A.3 lists the lattice spacings4 and indexed planes for these elements.

When atoms of two or more elements can be intermixed over a range of

concentrations on the sites of a given crystal structure, a solid solution is

formed. Many solid solutions become ordered at low temperatures. Ordering

involves a change from the nearly random distribution of the different types of

atoms at each atomic site to a more regular arrangement whereby designated

lattice sites are occupied predominately by one kind of atom.1 In a disordered

alloy of composition AB, for example, all the lattice sites are occupied by both

A and B atoms. On ordering, A and B atoms segregate to specific lattice sites,

so that the resulting arrangement can be described as a lattice of A atoms

interpenetrating a lattice of B atoms. The segregation of atoms to particular

lattice sites may take place with little or no deformation of the lattice, creating

an ordered solid solution, or superlattice, from a random solid solution.1

In a disordered solid solution, crystallographically equivalent atomic

planes are statistically identical, but in an ordered superlattice this need not be

true. For example, alternate planes of a set may become A-rich and B-rich

planes, respectively, and the distance between identical planes may become

twice the distance between identical planes of the disordered alloy (or some

other multiple of this distance). Hence, the structures of ordered alloys usually

produce diffraction patterns that have additional Bragg reflections. The

superlattice lines are associated with the new, larger atomic plane spacings

which are not present in the disordered alloys.

Interstitial solid solutions are formed when atoms with small radii are

Page 233: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

215

accommodated in the interstices of the lattice of a solvent. In a truly interstitial

solid solution the smaller atoms are merely deposited in the interstitial voids

(holes) between the bigger atoms, which may be assumed to be in contact. The

cph structure has two types of interstitial voids. As shown in Figure A.4, the

larger voids are surrounded by six atoms and are called octahedral voids.1 The

octahedral holes are of particular importance in the NiAs structure because

which they are occupied by Ni atoms while the As atoms lie on the close-

packed planes of the cph lattice.

The ordered Cu6Sn5 phase (IJ')6,7 has a structure that can be regarded as

a superlattice of the NiAs (B82) type, either with a = 20.83 A , c = 25.15 A,

c/a = 1.204,1 or with a = 20.89 A, c = 25.48 A, c/a = 1.214.2 As illustrated

in Figure A.5, the octahedral interstitial holes between the Cu atoms at 000

and 00>2 are sites 2c and 2d. Sites 2c are filled by Sn atoms, and sites 2d are

occupied by a mixture of 20% Cu atoms and 80% vacancies.8 Each layer is a

cph (0001) plane. The dimensions of the hexagonal pseudo-cell were reported

as a = 4.198 A, c = 5.096 A, c/a = 1.214.9 The orthorhombic unit cell

contains 230-250 Sn atoms and 300-280 Cu atoms, for an overall composition

of Cu6Sn5. The high-temperature modification 17 is possibly isotopic with NiAs.

Table A.4 lists the lattice spacings and indexed planes for the Cu6Sn5 phase.

The Cu3Sn phase (e) is orthorhombic, with 64 atoms per unit cell and a

= 4.34 A , b = 5.56 A, c = 38.18 A,1 or a = 4.382 A, b = 5.521 A , c =

33.25 A , 2 as shown in Figure A.6. The pseudo-cell has a = 4.34 A , b = 5.56

A , c = 4.765 A . Table A.5 lists the lattice spacings and indexed planes for

Cu3Sn phase.

The structure of AuSn4 is the same as PtSn4 and PdSn4 and has an

Page 234: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

216

orthorhombic unit cell, containing 20 atoms, with a = 6.44 A , b = 7.04 A and

c = 11.60 A.10 Table A.6 lists the lattice spacings and indexed planes for

AuSn4.

The Ag3Sn phase has a slightly rhombically deformed cph superlattice

with 4 atoms per unit cell,11,12,13 and a = 2.995 A, c = 4.780 A , c/a = 1 . 5 9 6 .

The Ag3Sn phase was found to undergo a transformation at about 60°C.14 X-

ray investigation showed that it is not accompanied by a lattice change.15 Table

A.7 lists the lattice spacings and indexed planes for Ag3Sn phase.

Ni3Sn4 is monoclinic, with 14 atoms per unit cell, similar to the CoSn

(B35) structure. At higher temperatures, the narrow homogeneity range shifts

to higher Ni contents: a = 12.22 A , b = 4.06 A , c = 5.33 A, /? = 105°3' at

57.3 at.% Sn; a = 12.31 A , b = 4.06 A , c = 5.18 A , £ = 103°48' at 54.8

at% Sn.16,17 Table A.8 lists the lattice spacings and indexed planes for Ni3Sn4.

Since the d-spacings are not listed in the handbook3, the d-spacings in Table

A.8 are the first 20 possible d(hk„ calculated using the lattice parameters.

Page 235: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Table A.1. Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of Pb

face-centered cubic, a = 4.9502 A

217

d (A) hkl

2.858 111

2.475 002

1.750 022

1.493 113

1.429 222

1.238 004

1.136 133

1.107 024

1.011 224

0.953 333 or 115

0.875 044

0.837 135

0.825 006 or 244

0.783 026

0.755 335

0.746 226

0.715 444

Page 236: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Table A.2. Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of /?-Sn

body centered tetragonal, a = 5.8315 A, c = 3.1814 A

218

d (A) hkl d (A) hkl

2.915 002 1.0252 125

2.793 101 0.9824 312

2.062 022 0.9718 006

2.017 112 0.9310 303

1.695 103 0.9280 215

1.484 211 0.9218 026

1.458 004 0.9178 116

1.442 123 0.8868 323

1.304 024 0.8755 145

1.292 114 0.8485 314

1.205 213 0.8466 235

1.0950 105 0.8386 136

1.0434 301 0.8086 046

1.0401 233 0.8058 107

1.0309 044

Page 237: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

219

Table A.3. Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of Cu, Ag, Au and Ni

face-centered cubic

hkl Cu Ag Au Ni hkl

a = 3.6150 A a = 4.0862 A a = 4.0780 A a = 3.5238 A

111 2.087 2.359 2.355 2.0345

002 1.808 2.044 2.039 1.7619

022 1.278 1.445 1.442 1.2460

113 1.090 1.231 1.230 1.0623

222 1.044 1.180 1.177 1.0172

004 0.904 1.022 1.020 0.8810

133 0.829 0.938 0.936 0.8084

024 0.808 0.914 0.912 0.7880

224 0.738 0.834 0.832 0.7193

333 or 115 0.696 0.786 0.785 0.6782

044 0.639 0.722 0.721 0.6229

135 0.610 0.691 0.689 0.5956

006 or 244 0.603 0.681 0.680 0.5873

026 0.572 0.646 0.645 0.5571

335 0.551 0.623 0.622 0.5374

226 0.545 0.616 0.615 0.5313

444 0.590 0.590 0.589 0.5086

Page 238: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

220

Table A.4. Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of Cu6Sn5

d-spacing (A) Indexed as

ordered

cph lattice

a = 4.198 A

c = 5.096 A

Indexed as

long period

superlattice

a = 20.83 A

c = 25.15 A

Calculated

from lattice

parameters

Handbook

value3

Experimental

value

Indexed as

ordered

cph lattice

a = 4.198 A

c = 5.096 A

Indexed as

long period

superlattice

a = 20.83 A

c = 25.15 A

5.10 5.12 5.028 001 005

3.57 3.66 3.558 501

2.96 2.98 2.941 101 505

2.55 2.56 2.549 002 0,0 ,10

2.10 2.12 2.164 110 550

2.09 2.10 2.085 102 5,0,10

1.94 1.95 1.912 111 555

1.82 1.83 1.835 200 10,0,0

1.73 1.72 1.738 10,0,4

1.71 1.71 1.664 201 10,0,5

Page 239: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

221

Table A.5. Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of Cu3Sn

d-spacing (A) Indexed as

ordered

orthorhombic

lattice

Indexed as

long period

superlattice

Calculated Handbook Experimental a = 4.24 A a = 4.34 A

from lattice value3 value b = 5.56 A b = 5.56 A

parameters c = 4.765 A c = 38.18 A

5.56 5.51 5.335 010 010

4.77 4.77 4.779 001 008

4.34 4.33 4.248 100 100

3.62 3.61 3.761 011 018

3.42 3.41 3.374 110 110

3.21 3.20 3.231 101 108

2.78 2.77 2.798 020 or 111 020 or 118

2.66 2.76 2.730 119

2.40 2.39 2.415 021 028

2.38 2.38 2.365 002 0,0,16

or 029

Page 240: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

222

Table A.6. Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of AuSn4

d-spacing (A) Indexed as

ordered

orthorhombic

lattice

a = 6.44 A

b = 7.04 A

c = 11.60 A

Calculated from

lattice

parameters

Handbook value3 Experimental

value

Indexed as

ordered

orthorhombic

lattice

a = 6.44 A

b = 7.04 A

c = 11.60 A

5.80 5.80 5.892 002

4.31 4.25 4.200 102

3.31 3.24 3.260 103

3.22 3.22 3.166 200

2.98 2.95 2.926 121

2.93 2.90 2.905 210

2.90 2.83 2.866 004

2.82 2.82 2.847 202

2.79 2.80 2.807 220

2.60 2.59 2.618 023 or 212

Page 241: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

223

Table A.7. Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of Ag3Sn

d-spacing (A) Indexed as

ordered

cph lattice

a = 2.995 A

c = 4 .780 A

Indexed as

long period

superlattice

a = 11.98 A

c = 4 .780 A

Calculated

from lattice

parameters

Handbook

value3

Experimental

value

Indexed as

ordered

cph lattice

a = 2.995 A

c = 4 .780 A

Indexed as

long period

superlattice

a = 11.98 A

c = 4 .780 A

5.19 5.18 5.124 200

3.92 3.91 4.046 210

3.73 3.73 3.719 111

3.52 3.51 3.494 201

3.03 3.03 211

2.99 2.98 2.956 220

2.59 2.59 2.591 100 400

2.39 2.39 2.427 002 002

2.33 2.38 2.329 102

2.28 2.28 2.283 101 401

Page 242: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

224

Table A.8. Lattice Spacings and Indexed Planes of Ni3Sn4

d-spacing (A) Indexed as ordered monoclinic lattice

a = 12.22 A b = 4.06 A c = 5.33 A p = 105°3'

Calculated from lattice parameters

Experimental value

Indexed as ordered monoclinic lattice

a = 12.22 A b = 4.06 A c = 5.33 A p = 105°3'

11.80 100

8.87 200

5.15 5.124 001

4.33 4.522 101

4.06 010

3.93 300

3.84 3.833 110

3.46 3.391 201

3.34 210

3.19 3.159 011

3.00 2.995 301

2.96 2.956 111 or 400

2.82 2.812 310

2.63 2.650 211

2.57 2.574 002

2.39 102

2.36 500

2.32 2.315 401

2.30 311

2.17 2.174 012

Page 243: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

225

(111) plane (110) plane

« / V 5 -

( a ) Face-centered cubic ( A l ) (6 ) Body-centered cubic (A2)

( 001 ) plane

(c) Close-packed hexagonal (A3 )

Figure A.1. The principal structures of metals; closest-packed planes are

indicated by shading, (a) faced-centered cubic (fee) (A1), (b) body-centered

cubic (bee) (A2), and (c) close-packed hexagonal (cph) (A3).1

Page 244: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

226

(hkl) reflecting

planes

incident beam

specimen

transmitted

beam

diffracted beam

transmitted spot

diffracted spot

Figure A.2. The diffraction camera geometry used to simulate the magnification

of the diffraction pattern by the microscope lenses.2

Page 245: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

227

Body-centered Tetragonal

2 atoms/unit cell

a = 5.8315 A

c = 3.1814 A

a / j 2

Figure A.3. The unit cell of yS-Sn.1

Page 246: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

228

Yi

Q Metal atoms

O Octahedral interstices

Figure A.4. The interstitial octahedral voids in the cph structure with an ideal

axial ratio c/a = V8 / 3.1

Page 247: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

229

(a)

2a Cu

2c Sn

0,1/2

0,1/2

2d Ordered mixture 20% Cu and 80% vacancies

(b) 0,1/2

Figure A.5. Crystal structure of ordered Cu6Sn5. (a) unit cell, (b) (0001)

projection with the distance above the projection plane indicated in units of c.8

Page 248: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

230

Sn

Cu

Figure A.6. Crystal structure of Cu3Sn.

Page 249: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

APPENDIX A REFERENCES

1. C.S. Barrett and T.B. Massalski, Structure of Metals, 3rd Ed., (Pergamon

Press, New York, 1980), Chapter 10.

2. J.W. Edington, Practical Electron Microscopy in Materials Science, (Van

Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 1976), Chapter 1.

3. Elemental and Interplanar Spacing Index, (U.S. Department of Commerce,

NIST and JCPDS International Center for Diffraction Data, 1989).

4. C.S. Barrett and T.B. Massalski, Structure of Metals, 3rd Ed., (Pergamon

Press, New York, 1980), Appendix.

5. J.W. Edington, Practical Electron Microscopy in Materials Science, (Van

Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 1976), Appendix 1.

6. J.D. Bernal, Nature, 122, 54, (1928).

7. 0. Carlsson and G. Hagg, Z. Krist, 83, 308 (1932).

8. W.J. Boettinger, Internal Memorandum, Metallurgy Division, NIST,

Gaithersburg, MD 20899.

9. A. Westgren and G. Phragmen, Z. anorg. Chem., 175, 80 (1928).

10. K. Schubert and U. Rosier, Z. Metallkunde, 41, 298 (1950).

11. 0. Nial, A. Almin and A. Westgren, Z. physik. Chem., B14, 83 (1931).

12. M.M. Umanskiy, Zhur. Fiz. Khim., 14, 846 (1940).

13. P. Michel, Compt. rend., 235, 377 (1952).

14. A.J. Murphy, J. Inst. Metals, 35, 107 (1926).

15. G.D. Preston, J. Inst. Metals, 35, 118 (1926).

231

Page 250: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

232

16. H. Nowotny and K. Schubert, Naturwissenschaften, 32, 76 (1944).

17. H.Nowotny and K. Schubert, Z. Metallkunde, 37, 23 (1946).

Page 251: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

APPENDIX B

SCANNING ELECTRON MICROSCOPY AND X-RAY MICROANALYSIS

233

Page 252: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

234

The modern scientist is required to observe, analyze and explain

phenomena occurring on a micrometer (/xm) or submicrometer scale. The

scanning electron microscope (SEM) is a powerful instrument which permits the

observation and characterization of materials and surfaces on this scale. In the

SEM, the area to be examined is irradiated with a finely focused electron beam,

which may be static or swept in a raster scan across the surface of the

specimen. The types of signals produced when the electron beam impinges on

a specimen surface include secondary electrons, backscattered electrons, Auger

electrons, characteristic x-rays and photons of various energies. These signals

are obtained from specific emission volumes within the sample and can be used

to determine many of the characteristics of the sample. In SEM, the signals of

greatest interest are the secondary, backscattered electrons and characteristic

x-rays. The basic components of the SEM are the electron gun, the lens

system, the electron detector, the visual and recording cathode ray tubes

(CRTs), and the electronics associated with them.1 Figure B.1 shows a

schematic of the electron and x-ray optics of a scanning electron microscope.1

B.1 Electron Guns

Electron optical columns of the SEM include the electron gun and two or

more electron lenses. The electron gun provides a stable source of electrons

which is used to form the electron probe. These electrons are usually obtained

from a source by thermionic emission. At sufficiently high temperatures, a

certain percentage of the electrons in a solid become sufficiently energetic to

overcome the work function of the cathode material and escape. The filament

materials commonly used are W and LaB6. The filament has a pointed tip and

Page 253: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

235

is heated directly or indirectly using a dc filament power supply. It is maintained

at a high negative voltage (1 -50 kV) during operation. At the filament operating

temperature, the emitted electrons leave the tip and are accelerated to ground

(anode) by the potential between the cathode and anode. The configuration of

a typical electron gun is shown in Figure B.2.2

Surrounding the filament is a grid cap or Wehnelt cylinder with a circular

aperture centered at the filament apex. The grid cap is biased negatively

between 0 and 2500 V with respect to the cathode. The electric field formed

with this gun configuration causes the emitted electrons from the filament to

converge to a crossover of dimension d0 with divergence angle a0 below the

Wehnelt cylinder, as shown in Figure B.2.

B.2 Electron Lenses

The condenser and objective lens systems are used to demagnify the

electron crossover (d0~ 10-50 /im) in the electron gun to the final spot size

used on the sample surface (5-200 nm). This represents a total demagnification

factor as large as 10,000. The condenser lens system, which is composed of

one or more lenses, determines the beam current which impinges on the

sample. The final probe-forming lens, called the objective lens, determines the

final spot size of the electron beam. Conventional electromagnetic lenses are

used and the electron beam is focused by the interaction of the electromagnetic

fields of the lenses with the moving electrons in the beam.

The magnetic lenses are similar to simple solenoid coils. Figure B.3

shows a schematic section of a cylindrical electromagnetic lens commonly used

as a condenser lens.2 The winding used to induce the magnetic field in the iron

Page 254: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

236

core may be seen in the figure. The bore of diameter D of the electromagnetic

lens is parallel to the direction in which the electrons are traveling. The gap

located in the center of the iron core is the distance S between the north and

south pole pieces of the lens. The strength of the magnetic lens, that is the

intensity of the magnetic field in the gap, is proportional to Nl, where N is the

number of turns in the solenoid winding, and I is the current flowing through

the lens. As an electron moves through the magnetic field, it experiences a

radial force inward, which is proportional to the Lorentz force. The lensing

action is similar to that of an optical lens, in which a ray parallel to the axis of

the lens is bent to the lens axis at the focal length, f, of the lens (Figure B.4).

In an optical lens, the focal length is fixed by the curvature of the lens surface

and cannot be changed. In an electromagnetic lens, the focal length depends

on two factors: the accelerating voltage and the current through the coil.

Therefore, the focal length of and electromagnetic lens can be controlled by

adjusting the current supplied to it.

The lenses in a scanning electron microscope reduce the diameter of the

electron beam to a very small size on the sample surface. As shown in Figure

B.4, the demagnification is M = S'/S, where S is the distance between the

object plane and principal plane of the lens and S' is the distance between the

image plane and the principal plane of the lens. As the focal length f is reduced,

the S' is reduced and M becomes smaller. After passing through the first

condenser lens, the electron beam diameter is reduced from d0 to d1f where d!

= Md0.

Figure B.5 shows the coupling of the three lenses; the object for a given

lens is the image from the lens above it. The net result is that the diameter of

Page 255: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

237

the electron beam at the sample surface, d3, is:

d3 = d0xM1xM2xM3 (B.1)

where IV^, M2, and M3are the demagnification factors for each lens.

The distance of the sample from the bottom of the objective lens is the

working distance, WD. Whenever WD is changed, the objective lens current,

and hence S3, must be adjusted to produce the minimum spot size on the

sample surface for the setting of condenser lenses C, and C2. This adjustment

is the focusing operation for the SEM.

B.3. Electron-Beam-Specimen Interactions

B.3.1. Scattering

Electron scattering is divided into two categories, elastic and inelastic

scattering, illustrated in Figure B.6.1 When elastic scattering occurs, the

direction of the electron is changed, but the magnitude of its velocity is

constant, so is the kinetic energy. Elastic scattering results from collisions of

the energetic electrons with the nuclei of the atom, partially screened by the

bound electrons. For a given thickness, elastic scattering is more probable for

high atomic number materials and at low beam energy.

The second general category of scattering is inelastic scattering. During

an inelastic scattering event, energy is transferred to the target atoms and

electrons, and the kinetic energy of the incident electron decreases. There are

a number of possible inelastic scattering processes. The principal processes of

interest in scanning electron microscopy are briefly described here. For a basic

reference, please see Kittel's Introduction to Solid State Physics.3

Page 256: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

238

(a) Plasmon Excitation. The beam electron can excite simple harmonic

oscillations in the "free electron gas" which exists between the ionic cores in

a solid. This is a highly probable inelastic scattering process.

(b) Excitation of Conduction Electrons Leading to Secondary Electron

(Low-Energy) Emission. The interaction of the incident electron with the solid

can cause electrons from the solid to be ejected, these are called secondary

electrons. They have initial kinetic energies between 0 and 50 eV.

(c) Ionization of Inner Shells. A sufficiently energetic electron can interact

with an atom and cause the ejection of a tightly bound inner-shell electron,

leaving the atom in an ionized and highly energetic state. Subsequent decay of

this excited state results in the emission of characteristic x-rays and Auger

electrons.

(d) Bremsstrahlung or Continuum X-rays. An energetic incident electron

can undergo deceleration due to Coulombic interactions with the atoms. The

energy lost from the incident electron in this deceleration is converted into an

x-ray photon, known as a bremsstrahlung ("braking radiation"). The

bremsstrahlung x-rays form a continuous spectrum from zero energy up to the

beam energy. The angular distribution of intensity of this continuum is

anisotropic.

(e) Excitation of Phonons. A substantial portion of the energy deposited

in the sample by the incident electron is transferred to the solid by the

excitation of lattice oscillations (phonons), i.e., heat.

The processes of elastic and inelastic scattering operate concurrently.

Inelastic scattering is favored at low atomic numbers and elastic scattering at

high atomic numbers. Elastic scattering causes the beam electrons to deviate

Page 257: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

239

from their original direction of travel, causing them to "diffuse" through the

solid. Inelastic scattering progressively reduces the energy of the beam electron

until it is captured by the solid, thus limiting the range of travel of the electron

within the solid. The region over which the beam electrons interact with the

solid, depositing energy and producing those forms of secondary radiation

which be measured, is known as the interaction volume. Monte Carlo

simulations of electron trajectories4,5,6 are especially useful in understanding the

size and shape of the interaction volume as a function of specimen and beam

parameters. An example of the Monte Carlo simulation is shown in Figure B.7.1

B.3.2. Backscattered Electrons

It is found experimentally that a significant fraction of the incident

electrons which strike a target subsequently escape from the target. These

reemergent incident electrons are collectively known as backscattered

electrons. The backscattered electron coefficient, a, is defined as the number

of backscattered electrons, nBS, divided by the number of beam electrons

incident on the target, nB; alternatively, electron currents may be used:

0 = _^BS=^BS (B.2)

Careful examination of the individual trajectories drawn using Monte Carlo

simulation reveals that the process of backscattering usually takes place as a

result of a sequence of elastic scattering events in which the net change in

direction is sufficient to carry the electron out of the specimen (Figure B.8).1 It

is possible for an electron incident normal to a specimen surface to scatter

Page 258: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

240

through an angle greater than 90° and thus escape the specimen after a single

scattering event. Backscattered electrons are extremely useful for imaging in

SEM.7

The incident electrons generally penetrate some distance into the solid

before undergoing a sufficient number of elastic scattering events to reverse

their direction of travel. The emerging backscattered electrons thus carry

information about the nature of the specimen over a range of depth. As shown

in Figure B.9,8 the backscattered coefficient, a, increases with increasing

atomic number, Z, and is relatively insensitive to beam energy.9 As the tilt angle

of the specimen increases, the opportunity for backscattering events increases.

The backscatter coefficient is approximately described by10

t] (0) = — — (B.3) (1+COS0)P

where 6 is the tilt angle, p = 9/Z% for pure elements and Z is the atomic

number. Since more electrons mean brighter signals, Eq. B.3 tells us that the

constant of backscatter electrons proportional to Z, the atomic number. In this

work, the elements interested are Cu, Sn, Pb, Au, Ag, Ni, etc., whose atomic

numbers are in the range from 28 to 82. Figure B.9 shows that these elements

have sufficient backscatter coefficients.

B.3.2 Secondary Electrons

Secondary electrons are defined as those electrons emitted from the

sample with an energy less than 50 eV (an arbitrary cutoff). The secondary

electron coefficient, 6, is given by

Page 259: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

241

5 = (B.4) nB iB

where nSE is the number of secondary electrons emitted from a sample

bombarded by nB incident electrons, and i designates the equivalent current.

Secondary electrons are produced as a result of interactions between energetic

beam electrons and weakly bound conduction electrons.11 The interaction

between the beam electron and the conduction band electron results in the

transfer of only a few electron volts of energy to the conduction band electron,

so they only come from the surface.

An important characteristic of secondary electrons is their shallow

sampling depth, a direct consequence of the low kinetic energy with which

they are generated. The mean free path of the secondary electrons is about 1

nm for metals and up to 10 nm for insulators. Compared to the behavior of

backscattered electrons, whose yield increases monotonically with the atomic

number of the specimen, the secondary electron coefficient is relatively

insensitive to composition and has no strong trend with atomic number. In

other words, the secondary electrons are sensitive to the surface topography,

but not the chemical composition.

B.3.3 X-Rays

During inelastic scattering of the incident electrons, x-rays can be formed

by two distinct processes: (1) Deceleration of the incident electron by the

Coulombic field of the atom core, which consists of the nucleus and tightly

bound electrons, leads to formation of a continuous spectrum of x-ray energies

Page 260: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

242

from zero energy up to the value of the incident electron energy, as shown in

Figure B. 10.1 This is the x-ray continuum or bremsstrahlung. (2) The interaction

of a incident electron with an inner-shell electron can result in the ejection of

the bound inner-shell electron which leaves the atom in an excited state with

a vacancy in the electron shell, as shown in Figure B.11.1 During subsequent

deexcitation, an electron transition occurs from an outer shell to fill this

vacancy. The transition involves a change in energy, and the energy released

from the atom can manifest itself either in the form of an x-ray or an ejected

(Auger) electron. Since the energy of the emitted x-ray is related to the

difference in energy between the sharply defined levels of the atoms, it is

referred to as a characteristic x-ray. Their specific energies (and wavelengths)

are characteristic of the particular element which is excited. The x-ray energies

may be used to identify the atoms present in the sample. The x-ray intensities

are related to the atomic concentrations.

The intensity of the continuum radiation increases with increasing atomic

number of the target and with increasing beam energy. The level of the

continuum radiation plays an important role in determining the minimum

detectable level for a particular element, since the continuum forms a

background against which characteristic signals must be measured.

B.4 Image Formation in the Scanning Electron Microscope

At any given point in time, the electron beam, defined by beam current,

i, beam diameter, d, and beam divergence, a, enters the specimen chamber and

strikes the specimen at a single controlled location. Within the interaction

volume, both elastic and inelastic scattering occur, producing detectable signals

Page 261: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

243

from backscattered electrons, secondary electrons, characteristic and

continuum x-rays, etc. These signals are related to the properties of the

specimen, i.e. local topography, composition, etc. By measuring the magnitude

of these signals with suitable detectors, the properties of the specimen can be

determined at the location of the electron beam impact. In order to study more

than a single location, the beam must be moved from place to place by means

of a scanning system, illustrated in Figure B.12.1 Scanning is usually

accomplished using electromagnetic coils arranged in pairs, one pair each for

deflection in the X and Y directions. The electron beam is moved over time to

sample the specimen properties at a controlled succession of points. In an

analog scanning system, the beam is moved continuously along a line (the line

scan), for example, in the X direction. After completion of the line scan, the

position of the line is shifted slightly in the Y direction (the frame scan), and the

process is repeated to produce a grid pattern. This process is known as

rastering.

In forming the SEM image, the beam is scanned on the specimen in an

X-Y pattern while the CRT is synchronously scanned in the same X-Y pattern,

as illustrated in Figure B.13.1 A one-to-one correspondence is established

between the set of beam locations on the specimen and the points on the CRT.

To display the electron interaction information, the signal intensity S derived

from the detector is used to adjust the brightness of the spot on the CRT

(intensity or Z modulation), as shown in Figure B.14.1 Thus, the creation of an

SEM image consists of constructing a map transforming information from

specimen space to CRT space.

Magnification in the SEM image is accomplished by adjusting the scale

Page 262: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

244

of the map on the CRT, and depends only on the excitation of the scan coils

and not the excitation of the objective lens, which determines the focus of the

beam. The smaller the scan area on the specimen, the larger the magnification

on the CRT.

B.5 X-Ray Energy Despersive Spectrometer (XEDS)

Chemical analysis in the SEM is performed by measuring the energy and

intensity distribution of the x-ray signals generated by a focused electron beam.

The operating principles of the XEDS are illustrated in Figure B. 1 5.1 The

x-ray signal from the sample passes through a thin beryllium window into a

cooled, reverse-bias p-i-n (p-type, intrinsic, n-type) lithium-drifted silicon

detector (SiLi detector). (Most detectors have Be windows, but new ones may

have polymers, or none at all if the vacuum is good enough.) Absorption of

each individual x-ray photon leads to the ejection of a photoelectron which

gives up most of its energy to the formation of electron-hole pairs. They in turn

are swept away by the applied bias to form a charge pulse which is then

converted to a voltage pulse by a charge-sensitive preamplifier. The voltage

pulses produced by the detector are on average proportional in size to the

incoming x-ray photon energy. The signal is further amplified and sharped by

a main amplifier, and finally passed on to a multichannel analyzer (MCA), where

the pulses are sorted by voltage. The contents of the MCA memory either

reside directly in a computer or can be transmitted to a computer for further

processing, such as peak identification and quantification.

The first stage in the analysis of an unknown is the identification of the

elements present. The identification of the major constituents of a sample can

Page 263: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

245

usually be done with a high degree of confidence. The quantitative analyses of

~1-jum3 regions of bulk samples can also be obtained using the x-ray

technology.

Page 264: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

246

CATHODE

WEHNELT CYLINDER

ANODE

SPRAY APERTURE

FIRST CONDENSER LENS

SECOND CONDENSER LENS

DOUBLE DEFLECTION COIL

STIGMATOR

FINAL (OBJECTIVE) LENS BEAM LIMITING APERTURE

X-RAY DETECTOR (WDS OR EDS)

PMT AMP

SCAN GENERATORS

SPECIMEN

SECONDARY ELECTRON DETECTOR

TO DOUBLE DEFLECTION COIL

MAGNIFICATION CONTROL-

Figure B.1. Schematic drawing of the electron and x-ray optics of a SEM.

Page 265: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

247

FILAMENT

WEHNELT^ CYLINDER \

EQUIPOTENTIALS

^ANOOE PLATE

BIAS RESISTOR

HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY

Raure B.2. Configuration of a typical self h i , ^ , y p , c a l se , f-b'ased electron gun.2

Page 266: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

248

z

< 0

P r U)

VIEW TOWARD OBJECT SPACE

Figure B.3. Schematic diagram of an axially symmetric electromagnetic lens.

The magnetic field lines are plotted along with the components of the magnetic

field.2

Page 267: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

2 4 9

Mognificotion, M = S'/ S

Principal plane

of lens Object plane Focal plane

Image plane

Y Lens axis

Figure B.4. Ray d iagram i l lustrat ing lensing act ion.

Page 268: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

250

Spray apertures

Sample (7

Final aperture o

r 1 __Scan coil ^ J ~ location

Figure B.5. Lensing action of the three lenses of a scanning electron

microscope.

Page 269: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

251

(o) ELASTIC E, *E„

(b) INELASTIC

Ej < E 0

4>j « 4 > e

Figure B.6. Schematic illustration of scattering processes which occur when an

energetic electron of energy E0 interacts with an atom, (a) Elastic scattering,

instantaneous energy E, after collision equals E0; (b) Inelastic scattering,

instantaneous energy E| less than E0.1

Page 270: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

252

0.5 ftm

0.5 Jim

Figure B.7. Monte Carlo electron trajectory simulation of the electron-sample

interaction in iron. E0 = 20 keV, tilt = 0°. (a) Plot of five trajectories, showing

random variations, (b) Plot of 100 trajectories giving a visual impression of the

interaction volume.1

Page 271: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

253

Figure B.8. Detailed single scattering Monte Carlo electron trajectory simulation

for a copper target, E0 = 30 keV, showing trajectories intersecting the sample

surface which result in backscattering.1

Page 272: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

254

0.6 r-

0 . 5 -

0.4 -

0.3

0 . 2 -

0.1 ~ 10 ktV

— 4 9 kt V

SPECIMEN TILT • 0*

-4- +> 4 -10 20 30 4 0 50 60 70 80 90

Figure B.9. Variation of the backscatter coefficient as a function of atomic

number at En = 10 keV and En = 49 keV.1

Page 273: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

255

WVVVVN

WVVVVIAA h v - E

Figure B.10. Schematic illustration of the origin of the x-ray continuum,

resulting from deceleration of the incident electrons by the Coulombic fields of

the atoms.1

Page 274: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

256

INCIDENT • ELECTRON

EJECTED ORBITAL ELECTRON

• SCATTERED PRIMARY ELECTRON

ELECTRON RELAXATION AND PHOTON GENERATION

p X-RAY PI P EMITTED

PHOTON INTERNALLY CONVERTED AND AUGER ELECTRON EMITTED

X-RAY PHOrON EMITTED

Figure B. 11. Schematic illustration of the process of inner-shell ionization and

subsequent deexcitation by either Auger electron emission or x-ray photon

emission.

Page 275: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

257

SCAN COILS

BACKSCATTERED X-RAY W.ED

CATHOOOUJMINESCENT I 23456789

- TRANSMITTED

DISPLAY AND RECORDING CRT's

VIDEO AMPLIFIERS

SECONDARY AND/OR BACKSCATTERED

Figure B. 12. Schematic illustration of scanning system of the scanning electron

microscope. FA, final aperture; SD, solid state backscattered electron detector;

ET, Everhart-Thornley detector composed of S, scintillator and PM,

photomultiplier; ED, energy dispersive x-ray spectrometer; CRT, cathode ray

tube. The numbers 1-9 indicate successive beam positions during a single

scanning sequence. Also: PM for cathodoluminescance, WD for wavelength

dispersive x-ray spectrometer.1

Page 276: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

258

AREA SCANNED ON SPECIMEN

XXXXX XXXXX

' Z i

x x

X X X X X

INFORMATION TRANSFER

AREA SCANNED ON CATHODE RAY TUBE

Figure B.13. The principle of information display by image scanning. A

correspondence is established between a set of locations on the specimen and

on the CRT. Magnif ication = L//.1

Page 277: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

259

SPECIMEN CRT DISPLAY

xxxx xxxx XXX

GU.y.D

Figure B.14. The principle of intensity or Z modulation used to display the

magnitude of the signal produced by electron-specimen interaction at the

locations scanned in Figure B. 13. Black represents low intensity; stippled,

intermediate intensity; white, high intensity.1

Page 278: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

260

PILEUP REJECTOR ELECTRON

BEAM CRYOSTAT

DETECTOR

FET PREAMPLIFIER

B AS SUPPLY

DATA OUTPUT DEVICE

SPECIMEN

ULTICHANNEL ANALYZER

Aa^/ lL.

DISPLAY

COMPUTER

X-RAY SIGNAL

Figure B.15. Schematic representation of an x-ray energy-dispersive

spectrometer.

Page 279: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

APPENDIX B REFERENCES

1. J.I. Goldstein, D.E. Newbury, P. Echlin, D.C. Joy, C. Fiori and E. Lifshin,

Scanning Electron Microscopy and X-Ray Microanalysis, (Plenum Press,

New York, 1981).

2. C.E. Hall, Introduction to Electron Microscopy, (McGraw Hill, New York,

1953).

3. C. Kittel, \r\troduction to Solid State Physics, 6th Ed., (Wiley, New York,

1986).

4. M.J. Berger, Methods in Computational Physics, Vol.1, B. Adler, S.

Fernback and M. Rotenberg Eds., (Academic, New York, 1963).

5. R. Shimizu and K. Murata, J. Appl. Phys., 42, 387 (1971).

6. K.F.J. Heinrich, D.E. Newbury and H. Yakowitz, National Bureau of

Standards Spec. Pub. 460, (Washington, DC, 1976).

7. O.C. Wells, SEM/1977/I, NT Research Institute, p.747, (Chicago, Illinois,

1977).

8. K.F.J. Heinrich, X-Ray Optics and Microanalysis, 4th Intl. Cong, on X-

Ray Optics and Microanalysis, R. Castaing, P. Deschamps and J.Philibert

Eds., p. 1509, (Hermann, Paris, 1966).

9. K.F.J. Heinrich, The Electron Microprobe, T.D. McKinley, K.F.J. Heinrich

and D.B. Wittry Eds., p.296, (Wiley, New York, 1966).

10. F. Arnal, P. Verdier and P-D. Vincinsini, C.R. Acad. Sci., 268, 1526

(Paris, 1969).

261

Page 280: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

262

11. H.W.Streitwolf, Ann. Phys., 3, 183 (Leipzig, 1959).

Page 281: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

APPENDIX C

PRINCIPLES OF TRANSMISSION ELECTRON MICROSCOPY

263

Page 282: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

264

A number of the microstructural studies presented in this work were

performed using the Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM). The purpose of

this appendix is to provide some basic background on TEM.

C.1 Basic Principles of Transmission Electron Microscopy

A transmission electron microscope is similar to an optical microscope.

It has a source, which is an electron beam, and magnetic lenses (condenser,

objective and projector lenses). Figure C.1 illustrates the basic structure of the

TEM.1 The electron microscope uses an electron beam to illuminate a specimen

whereas an optical microscope uses a light beam. The theoretical resolution of

an optical system is determined by Rayleigh's criterion:2

a =1.22— (C.1) D

where a is the angular resolution, X is the wavelength of the source, and D is

the diameter of the objective aperture. The wavelength of visible light is 3600 -

7200 A.2 Electrons may be regarded as particle waves with wavelength X

given by the de Broglie relation X = h/mv. If the electron is accelerated to a

voltage Ve, the relativistically corrected wavelength is3

h '1 (c.2)

[2mFee(1 +eFe/2mc2)]1/2

where h is Planck's constant, m is the mass of the electron, e is its charge, and

c is the velocity of light. At 100 kV and 200 kV, the conventional accelerating

voltages for transmission electron microscopy, the relativistically corrected

wavelengths are 0.0371 A and 0.0251 A , respectively. It is this wavelength

Page 283: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

265

difference that leads to the tremendous resolution difference between an

electron microscope and an optical microscope.

In Equation C.1, a is proportional to 1/D, which means that the

resolution can be improved by increasing the diameter of the objective lens

aperture. However, the resolution is also affected by the defects inherent in all

lenses. Three major lens defects are spherical aberration, chromatic aberration

and astigmatism, which are discussed in detail by J.W. Edington3 and A.W.

Agar et al.1 Chromatic aberration and astigmatism can be minimized in the TEM

by proper lens design. Hence, as given by J.W. Edington,3 the maximum

resolution of an electron microscope is determined by:

d . = j3/4C i/4 ( C 3 ) "min A s

where Cs is the spherical aberration coefficient of the objective lens and X is the

electron wavelength. Equation C.3 shows that the two most important

parameters affecting the resolution of a transmission electron microscope are

the wavelength and the spherical aberration coefficient of the objective lens.

This equation is the standard resolution criterion used for a TEM.

In principle, either electrostatic or magnetic lenses can be used to focus

a beam of electrons.4 Practical instruments exclusively employ magnetic lenses

since they can be made with smaller defects than electrostatic lenses.1 A

detailed discussion of magnetic lens theory is given by C.E. Hall.4 In brief, a

magnetic lens is made with soft-iron pole pieces. Highly concentrated magnetic

fields are generated by currents flowing through annular coils to focus the

electron beam. Electrons passing through the magnetic field travel in a helical

path. This additional rotary motion is a characteristic of magnetic lenses.

Page 284: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

266

C.2 The Formation of Images and Diffraction Patterns

A transmission electron microscope can provide two types of

information, microstructural images and electron diffraction patterns. The

essential features of the imaging and diffraction modes in a TEM can be

explained in terms of a geometric optics treatment of the situation at the

objective lens as shown in Figure C.2.3 An electron beam parallel to the optic

axis passes through the specimen and forms an image at the image plane. The

action of forming this image brings both the transmitted and the diffracted

beams to a focus in the back focal plane of the objective lens. Since both a

diffraction pattern and an image of the specimen are always produced by the

objective lens at the same time, a magnified image of either may be produced

on the viewing screen by focusing the next lens in the magnification system on

either the image plane or the focal plane of the objective lens.

C.2.1 Bright and Dark Field Images

Several types of images can be obtained by appropriately using the

objective aperture, located in the back focal plane of the objective lens. Bright

field (BF) and centered dark field (DF) are the most commonly used imaging

modes for materials studies. Both types of image may be understood in terms

of the image forming characteristics of the objective lens and the use of the

objective aperture. As shown in figure C.3a, with a small aperture inserted in

the back focal plane of the objective lens, the diffracted beams are intercepted

and only the transmitted beam is allowed to pass. Thus the image formed on

the viewing screen is only from the transmitted beam, which is called the bright

field image. Alternatively, the objective aperture can be displaced away from

Page 285: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

267

the optical axis to intercept the transmitted beam and allow a diffracted beam

to contribute to the image, forming a dark field image. However, when the

electron path is far away from the optical axis, a poor quality image is produced

because of the additional lens aberrations from off-axis rays. To retain the

resolution of the bright field mode, the illumination incident on the specimen is

tilted so that the diffracted electrons travel along the optic axis, as shown in

figure C.3b, and a centered dark field image is obtained. The purpose of using

BF and DF images is to improve the image contrast without losing detailed

information of the specimen. DF images also are used to identify regions of the

specimen that are composed of a specified phase.

C.2.2 Selected Area Diffraction Patterns

Electron diffraction patterns are routinely obtained in the transmission

electron microscope and are used to gain quantitative information on the

identity of phases and their orientation relationship to the matrix.

In practice, diffraction patterns are usually formed from specific regions

of the specimen, known as selected area diffraction patterns (SADP). As shown

in Figure C.2, an aperture is inserted coplanar with the image in the image

plane of objective lens to allow only the transmitted and diffracted rays

generated within the region AB of the specimen to pass into the remaining

imaging system. Those rays from outside this region are blocked by the

aperture and do not contribute to the diffraction pattern formed in the back

focal plane of the objective lens. Therefore, the diffraction pattern formed on

the viewing screen provides information only from material present in the AB

region.

Page 286: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

268

When a beam of electrons is incident on the top surface of a thin

crystalline specimen, specific diffracted beams occur at the bottom exit

surface. Although each individual atom in the crystal scatters the incident

beam, the strong diffracted beams arise because scattered wavelets are in

phase in particular directions in the crystal, that is, the path difference is an

integral number of wavelengths. Consider the particular case shown in Figure

C.4 when the incident beam is made up of plane waves in phase and oriented

at an angle 6 relative to two (hkl) crystal Planes I and II.3 Let the two waves be

reflected by these crystal planes at an angle 0.

At the plane wavefront CD two situations may occur: (1) The two waves

may be in phase, as shown in Figure C.4, in which case reinforcement will

occur and a strong reflected beam will be present. (2) The waves may be out

of phase, that is they will destructurely interfere and there will be either a zero

intensity or a very weak reflected beam.

Case (1), that is a strong beam, will occur if the path difference POD is

an integral number of wavelengths, nX. PO = OD = OL sin 0. OL is the

interplannar spacing d(hk0. Thus for a strong reflection,

2dhkls\x\%=n'k (C.4)

which is Bragg's law. There will be a strong diffracted beam on the exit side of

the crystal only if there is a set of crystal planes oriented at a critical angle 6

relative to the incoming beam.

Electron diffraction patterns produced in transmission in the electron

microscope can be of three different types: ring patterns, spot patterns, and

board ring patterns, which correspond to polycrystalline, single-crystal, and

Page 287: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

269

amorphous or nanocrystalline materials, respectively.

While spot patterns are from single-crystal regions of the specimen, ring

patterns arise from fine grain size polycrystalline material such as physically or

chemically vapor deposited or electrodeposited thin foils. For a given beam

direction a number of fine grain particles within the area illuminated by the

beam will be oriented to satisfy Bragg's law for all allowed reflecting planes.

However, one individual grain will produce a specific beam reflected from a

particular (hkl) plane, such that the angle between it and the incident beam is

28, satisfying Bragg's law. For randomly oriented particles and a specific

reflecting plane (hkl), these beams will lie in a cone with apex angle 4^(hk0

centered on the incident beam direction to produce a ring in the diffraction

pattern. Since a number of {hkl} planes will reflect, a series of concentric rings

will be produced, each one corresponding to a particular set of (hkl) reflections.

The diffraction pattern from amorphous materials is devoid of the sharp

lines characteristic of crystals and consists of broad features.5,6 The diffraction

from amorphous materials is weak, and is less quantitative.

Diffraction patterns are most commonly used for phase identification.

The diameter of the diffraction ring or the distance from the diffracted spot to

the transmitted beam in the spot pattern are characteristics of the interplanar

spacings, d(hkl), of the reflecting planes. The method of determining the d-

spacings from the SADP has been discussed briefly in Appendix A, and a

detailed discussion is given by J.W. Edington.3 After determining the d-

spacings, the phase can be identified using a published spacing index.7

Page 288: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

270

C.3 JEOL JEM - 100 CX and JEM - 200 CX

Two transmission electron microscopes, the JEOL JEM -100 CX and

JEOL JEM - 200 CX, were used in this work. Except for different operating

voltage, magnification range, and resolution, which are compared in Table C.1,

these two microscopes have almost identical internal structures.8,9 As shown

in Figure C.5, both microscopes have 6 magnetic lenses: two condenser lenses,

one objective lens, two intermediate lenses and one projector lens. The JEM

100 - CX also has a scanning unit (STEM) and can be interfaced to an X-ray

energy dispersive spectrometer (XEDS) for chemical analysis. XEDS is described

in Appendix B.

Page 289: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

271

Table C.1. JEOL JEM -100 CX and JEOL JEM -200 CX

Electron Microscope Performance Specifications

Property JEOL JEM - 100 CX8 JEOL JEM -200 CX9

accelerating voltage up to 100 kV up to 200 kV

resolution 1.4 A (lattice) 1.4 A (lattice) resolution

3.0 A (point to point) 3.5 A (point to point)

magnification up to 320,000x up to 450,000x

interfaced to XEDS yes no

Page 290: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

272

Source \ j Filament

Condenser lens

Objective tens ~

Projector

lens *•"

Intermediate image

Viewing screen

Electron microscope

Figure C.1. The basic structure of the transmission electron microscope.1

Page 291: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

273

back focal plane

diffraction J pattern

incident beam

specimen objective

lens

selected area aperture

Figure C.2. Formation of image and diffraction pattern by the objective lens.:

Page 292: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

274

objective h 0 * * * 0 1

incident — beam — ^

diffrocted spot

transmitted spot

specimen

objective aperture

( o ) image

. . , back focal o b ie c , , w e plane

tilted incident beam

diffracted spot

specimen

transmitted spot

objective aperture

(b) image

Figure C.3. Bright field and dark field image formation, (a) Bright field and (b)

centered dark field.3

Page 293: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

275

top of thin foil

crystal plane II

bottom of thin foil

incident electron beam

plane wave in phase

crystal plane I

1000-3000 X

incident electron beam

transmitted beam

diffracted beam

(b)

Figure C.4. (a) Reflection at the Bragg angle 6 from crystal planes in a thin foil

electron microscope specimen, (b) The relationship between incident,

transmitted and diffracted beams for a transmitting specimen.3

Page 294: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

276

1

Lift

Electron gun

Wehnelt unit

Anode

Electron gun 2nd beam deflector coil

Anode chamber airlock valve

Condenser lens pole piece

Condenser lens aperture assembly

Beam displacement compensating coil

Condenser lens 1st beam deflector coil-

Condenser lens 2nd beam deflector coil Blanking plate Objective lens aperture assembly

Objective lens pole piece

Objective lens stigmator coil

Field limiting aperture assembly

Intermediate lens pole piece

Projector lens pole piece

Viewing window

Dispensing magazine

Receiving magazine

HV cable

Anode chamber

Gas inlet

Electron gun 1st beam deflector coil

-1st condenser lens coil

2nd condenser lens coil

Image wobbler coil

Condenser lens stigmator coil

Specimen chamber

Goniometer

Specimen holder

Objective lens coil

1st intermediate lens coil

2nd intermediate lens coil

Projector lens coil

Shutter

High resolution diffraction chamber

Viewing chamber airlock valve

Viewing chamber

Fluorescent screen

Camera chamber

Figure C.5. JEOL JEM - 200 internal structure.

Page 295: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

APPENDIX C REFERENCES

1. A.W. Agar, R.H. Alderson and D. Chescoe, Principles and Practice of

Electron Microscope Operation, (North-Holland, Amsterdam, 1974).

2. F.G. Smith and J.H. Thompson, Optics, (Wiley, New York, 1971).

3. J.W. Edington, Practical Electron Microscopy in Materials Science, (Van

Nostrand, New York, 1976).

4. C.E. Hall, Introduction to Electron Microscopy, (McGraw-Hill, New York,

1966).

5. B.E. Warren, X-Ray Diffraction, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, 1969).

6. L.H. Schwartz and J.B. Cohen, Diffraction from Materials, (Springer-

Verlag, Berlin, 1987).

7. Elemental and Interplannar Spacing Index, (U.S. Department of

Commerce, NIST and JCPDS International Center for Diffraction Data,

1989).

8. Instruction Manual for JEM - 100 CX Electron Microscope, JEOL Ltd.,

Tokyo, Japan.

9. Instruction Manual for JEM - 200 CX Electron Microscope, JEOL Ltd.,

Tokyo, Japan.

277

Page 296: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

APPENDIX D

STATISTICAL ANALYSIS

278

Page 297: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

279

Experimental error or noise is one difficulty typically confronting the

scientific investigator. Variation produced by various factors, both known and

unknown, is called experimental error. Usually, only a small fraction of the total

error is directly attributable to error in measurement. Important effects may be

wholly or partially obscured by experimental error. Conversely, through

experimental error, the experimenter may be misled into believing in effects that

do not exist. The confusing effects of experimental error can be greatly reduced

by adequate statistical analysis of the experimental data. Furthermore,

statistical analysis can result in a measure of the precision of the measured

parameter under study.

D.1 Descriptive Measurement

When an experiment is repeated under what are, as nearly as possible,

the same conditions, the observed results are never quite identical. The

fluctuation that occurs from one repetition to another is called experimental

variation, experimental error, or merely error.

The total aggregate of measurements that conceptually might occur as

the result of performing a particular operation in a particular way is referred to

as the population of measurements. While it is sometimes convenient to think

of this population as infinite, the experiments are finite of size N, where N is

large. The actual experimental values are a sample from this population.

One important parameter of a sample is the average value. Given a set

of n measurements, x1f x2,..., xn, the arithmetic mean or the sample mean, x,

is defined by:

Page 298: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

280

2 *< (D.1) i=1

x = -n

The mean describes the center of the probability distribution and the average

value of the sample.

If we imagine a hypothetical population as containing a very large

number of measurements, N, we can denote the corresponding average of the

population by:

N

2 *< (D.2) i=1

\x= N

To distinguish between the sample and population quantities, we call ju.

the population mean, and x the sample average. In general, a parameter like the

mean fi is a quantity directly associated with the population, and a statistic like

the average x is a quantity calculated from a set of data which is a sample from

the population. The mean of the population is also called the expected value.

The spread in a population is estimated by the standard deviation. The

standard deviation of n measurements is defined as:

n

2 fa - x f (D.3) i=1

n - 1

For n independent measurements drawn from a continuous population with

Page 299: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

281

mean /*, if the distribution of the sample average x is normally distributed, then

the Central Limit Theory guarantees that the expected value of the

measurement (mean of the population) will be within the interval:

x - 1 . 9 6 - ^ - < \i ^x + 1 .96-^- (D.4) yfH ^

with probability 0.95.1

It can be seen from Eq D.4 that as the sample set, n, gets larger and

larger, the average, x, has a large probability of being closer and closer to the

mean of the population, fi, i.e. the expected value.

In the kinetic and microstructural studies of the interfacial intermetallic

layers at solder/copper substrate interfaces, the thickness measurements of the

intermetallic phases Cu6Sn5 and Cu3Sn were made using a digitizing tablet

interfaced to a personal computer. Micrographs of the solder/copper interface

region were placed on the digitizer pad and pairs of points representing a single

measurement of the intermetallic thickness were recorded. A minimum of 100

such measurements equally spaced along the interface were made for each

thickness reported. This procedure results in high quality data that can be

reliably analyzed with statistical significance. The distribution of the

measurements, the average thickness, the standard deviation, and the

maximum and minimum thickness values were calculated. One set of these

thickness measurement analyses are summarized in Table 4.1.

D.2. Simple Linear Regression

If there is a linear relationship between two variables, then a simple linear

Page 300: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

282

regression model can be used to fit the data. A simple linear regression model

has the form:

Yr p0 + ^ + e(. i = 1,2, •••, n (D.5)

where Y ; is the value of the dependent variable for the ith measurement, X; is

the value of the independent variable for the ith measurement, (30 is the

intercept parameter, jSJ is the slope parameter, e; is an error term representing

deviations of the ith measurement from the line jSo+ft X; , and n is the number

of measurements.

The parameters 0O and /3t are estimated by the method of least square

fitting, which minimizes the squared distances of the measurements from the

expected linear relationship. Choose b0 and to minimize

s [ r, - (b0 • fc,x()]

Once b0 and bj have been determined, the estimated regression equation

becomes:

Y, *= f»„ • b,X, ID'6)

Equation D.6 is an approximation of the true relationship : Yj = |30+ &X,.

R2, called the linear correlation coefficient, is calculated as:1

Page 301: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

283

I)(y!-rf fl2=_£z1 (D.7)

n

h(Y,-Y)z

i=1

where Y; is the value of the dependent variable for the ith measurement, Y is

the average mean of Y; (i = 1 to n), Yj* is the regression value which

corresponds to Y;. R2 is a measure of the quality of the regression analysis and

represents the fraction of the variation about the mean that is explained by the

fitting. It is often used as an overall measure of the fit attained. The value of

R2 is between 0 and 1. R2 is close to 1 if the independent variable explains a

relatively large amount of variability in the dependent variable, i.e., there is an

excellent linear correlation between the two variables, X; and Yf.

The values of the diffusion coefficient for each intermetallic at a given

temperature were calculated by measuring the thicknesses of the intermetallic

layers and applying the standard diffusion model, Eq. 4.1. The excellent linear

relationships between the variables in the model, described by the R2 values

(generally greater than 0.9 except for the Ni composite solder, which was

greater than 0.75), demonstrates that the model is valid. When calculating the

activation energies, the linear correlation coefficients, R2, for the activation

energy plots are all greater than 0.9. Again, the good linear fit indicates a valid

model.

Page 302: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

APPENDIX D REFERENCES

1. G.E.P. Box, W.G. Hunter and J.S. Hunter, Statistics for Experimenters:

An Introduction to Design, Data Analysis, and Model Building (Wiley,

New York, 1978).

284

Page 303: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1. Aesar, Inc., 30 Bond Street, Ward Hill, MA 01835.

2. Agar, A.W.; Alderson, R.H.; and Chescoe, D., Principles and Practice of

Electron Microscope Operation, (North-Holland, Amsterdam, 1974).

3. ' Arnal, F.; Verdier, P.; and Vincinsini, P-D., C.R. Acad. Sci., 268, 1526

(Paris, 1969).

4. ASM Metals Handbook, Metallography and Microstructures, 9th ed,

(ASM International, 1985).

5. Bader, W.G., Welding Journal, 54, 370s (1975).

6. Bader, W.G., Welding Journal, 48, 551s (1969).

7. Barrett, C.S. and Massalski, T.B., Structure of Metals, 3rd Ed.,

(Pregamon Press, New York, 1980), Chapter 10.

8. Berger, M.J., Methods in Computational Physics, Vol.1, eds. B. Adler,

S. Fernback, and M. Rotenberg, (Academic, New York, 1963).

9. Bernal, J.D., Nature, 122, 54 (1928).

10. Bondi, A., Chem. Rev. 52, 417 (1953).

11. Borden, Inc., HPPG, Columbus, OH 43215.

12. Borelius, G., Trans. AIME, 191, 477 (1951).

13. Borg, R.J. and Diences, G.J., An Introduction to Solid State Diffusion,

(Academic Press, New York, 1988).

285

Page 304: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

286

14. Box, G.E.P.; Hunter, W.G.; and Hunter, J.S., Statistics for

Experimenters: An Introduction to Design, Data Analysis, and Model

Building, (Wiley, New York, 1978).

15. Braudo, E.E.; Michalow, E.N.; and Tolstogusow, W.B., Z. Phys. Chem.,

Leipzig, 253, 369 (1973).

16. Brothers, E.W., The Western Electric Engineer, 49 (1981).

17. Buene, L.; Falkenberg-Arell H.; and Tafto, J., Thin Solid Films, 65, 247

(1980).

18. Cagnon, M.; Suery, M.; Eberhardt, A.; and Baudelet, B., Acta Met. 25,

71 (1977).

19. Carlsson, 0. and Hagg, G., Z. Krist, 83, 308 (1932).

20. Chilton, J.P. and Winegard, W.C., J. Inst. Met., 89, 162 (1960).

21. Clum, J.A. and Singler, T.J., Proc. 3rd Elec. Mater. Proc. Congress, 175

(1990).

22. Considine, D.M., Van Nostrand's Scientific Encyclopedia, 5th ed., p.710,

(Van Nostrand, New York, 1976).

23. Davis, P.E.; Warwick, M.E.; and Kay, P.J., Plating and Surface Finishing,

69, 72 (1982).

24. Davis, P.E.; Warwick, M.E.; and Muckett, S.J., Plating and Surface

Finishing, 70, 49 (1983).

25. Dehaven, P.W., Mat. Res. Soc. Symp. Proc., 40, 123 (1985).

26. Dirnfield, S.F. and Ramon, J.J., Welding Journal, 48, 373 (1990).

27. Dufner, D.C., "Imageing of Chemical Reactions in Binary Alloys by High-

Resolution TEM", Presented at the Texas Society for Electron Microscop

Symposium, San Macros, TX, March 27, 1992.

Page 305: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

287

28. Dunn, D.S.; Marinis, T.F.; Sherry, W.M.; and Williams, C.J., Electronic

Packaging Materials Science, E.A. Geiss, K.N. Tu, and D.R. Uhlman,

Eds., (MRS, PA, 1985), p 129.

29. Dunn, D.S.; Marinis, T.F.; Sherry W.M.; and Williams, C.J., Mater. Res.

Soc. Symp. Proc., 40, 129 (1985).

30. Duro, Loctite Corp., Cleveland, OH 44128.

31. Dyson, B.F., J. Appl. Phys. 37, 2375 (1966).

32. Dyson, B.F.; Anthony, T.R.; and Turnbull, D., J. Appl. Phys. 38, 3408

(1967).

33. ibid 37, 2370 (1966).

34. ibid. 37, 2374 (1966).

35. Edington, J.W., Practical Electron Microscopy in Materials Science, (Van

Nostrand, New York, 1976).

36. Elemental and Interplannar Spacing Index, (U.S. Department of

Commerce, NIST, and JCPDS International Center for Diffraction Data,

1989).

37. Elliott, R.,Eutectic Solidification Processing, (Betterworths, London,

1983).

38. Frear, D.R., Ph.D. Thesis, University of California at Berkeley, 1987.

39. Frear, D.R.; Grivas, D.; and Morris, Jr. J.W., J. Electr. Mat., 16, 181

(1987).

40. Frear, D.R., Posthill, J.B., and Morris, Jr. J.W., Metal. Trans. A, 20A,

1325 (1989).

41. Frebel, M. and Otte, B., Scripta Met., 9, 1317 (1975).

Page 306: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

288

42. Hall, C.E., Introduction to Electron microscopy, (McGraw Hill, New York,

1953).

43. Hansen, M. and Anderko, K., Constitution of Binary Alloys, 2nd Ed.,

(McGraw-Hill, New York, 1958), p.232.

44. Heinrich, K.F.J., The Electron Microprobe, Eds. McKinley, T.D.; Heinrich,

K.F.J, and Wittry, D.B., p.296, (Wiley, New York, 1966).

45. Heinrich, K.F.J., X-Ray Optics and Microanalysis, 4th Intl. Cong, on X-

Ray Optics and Microanalysis, Eds. Castaing, R; Deschamps, P. and

Philibert, J., p. 1509, (Hermann, Paris, 1966).

46. Heinrich, K.F.J.; Newbury, D.E. and Yakowitz, H., National Bureau of

Standards Spec. Pub. 460, (Washington, DC, 1976).

47. Hopkins, R.H. and Kraft, R.W., Trans. AIME, 242, 1627 (1968).

48. Howes, M.A. and Saperstein, Z.P., Welding Journal, 48, 80s (1969).

49. Huang, F.H. and Huntington, H.B., Phys. Rev. B9, 1479 (1974).

50. Huang, K., Statistical Mechanics, (Wiley, New York, 1987), Chap. 7.

51. Hume-Rothery, W. and Raynor, G.V., The Structure of Metals and

Alloys, (Pergamon Press, New York), p.97.

52. Hunt, J.D., J. Inst. Met., 94, 125 (1964).

53. Instruction Manual for JEM - 100 CX Electron Microscope, JEOL Ltd.,

Tokyo, Japan.

54. Instruction Manual for JEM - 200 CX Electron Microscope, JEOL Ltd.,

Tokyo, Japan.

55. Instruction Manual for 69 - 1000 Minimet Polisher/Grinder, Buehler Ltd.,

41 Waukegan, Lake Bluff, IL 60044.

Page 307: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

289

56. International Electronic Materials Corporation, 30275 Bainbridge Road,

Cleveland, OH 44139.

57. Jacobs, E.G.; Foster, L.A.; Wu, Y.; Wilson, A.R. and Pinizzotto, R.F., J.

Mater. Res., 8, 87 (1993).

58. JEOL SVC, JEOL Engineering Service Company, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan.

59. Jesior, J.-C., J. Ultrastr. and Mol. Str. Res., 95, 210 (1986).

60. Jesior, J.-C., Scanning Microscopy Supplement, 3, 147 (1989).

61. Kalish, H.S.; and Dunkerley, F.J., Trans. AIME, 180, 637 (1949).

62. Kashyap, B.P. and Murty, G.S., Mat. Sci. and Eng., 50, 205 (1981).

63. Kay, P.J. and Mackay, C.A., Trans. Inst. Metal Finishing, 57, 169

(1979).

64. Kay, P.J. and Mackay, C.A., Trans. Inst. Metal Finishing, 54, 68 (1976).

65. Kay, P.J. and MacKay, C.A., Trans. Inst. Metal Finishing, 51, 85 (1973).

66. Keller, H.N., IEEE Trans. CHMT, 9, 433 (1986).

67. Kilinski, T.J.; Lesniak, J.R.; and Sandor, B.I., Solder Joint Reliability, J.H.

Lau Eds., (Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 1991), Chapter 13.

68. Kinsman, K.R., Solder Mechanics: A State of the Art Assessment, D.R.

Frear, W.B. Jones, K.R. Kinsman, Eds., (TMS, PA, 1991), p XIX.

69. Kittel, C. Introduction to Solid State Physics, 6th eds., (Wiley, New

York, 1986).

70. Kumar, K.; Moscaritolo, A.; and Brownawell, M., J. Electrochemical

Society, 128, 2165 (1981).

71. Labulle, B. and Petipas, C., J. Cryst. Growth, 28, 279 (1975).

72. Lucey, G.L.; Marshall, J.L.; Handwerker, C.; Tench, D.; and Sunwoo, A.,

Proc. NEPCON WEST '91, 1, 3 (1991).

Page 308: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

290

73. Malis, T. and Steele, D., Mat. Res. Soc. Symp. Proc., 254, 257 (1992).

74. Manko, H.H., Solderer and Soldering, 2nd Ed., (McGraw-Hill, New York,

1979), Chapter 1.

75. Manning, J.R., Diffusion Kinetics for Atoms in Crystals, (Van Nostrand,

New York, 1968).

76. Marcotte, V.C. and Schroder, K., Mater. Res. Soc. Symp. Proc. 19, 403

(1983).

77. Marshall, J.L.; Calderson, J.; Sees, J.A.; Lucey, G.; and Hwang, J.S.,

IEEE Trans. CHMT, 14, 698 (1991).

78. Mayer, J.W. and Lau, S.S., Electronic Materials Science: For Integrated

Circuits in Si and GaAs, (Macmillan, New York, 1990).

79. McLean, M., Directionally Solidified Eutectic, (The Metals Society,

London, 1983).

80. Meakin, J.D. and Klokholm, E., Trans. AIME, 218, 463 (1960).

81. Mei, Z. and Morris, J.W. Jr., J. Elec. Mater., 21, 599 (1992).

82. Metals Handbook 8th Eds.,Vol. 8, Metallographs, Structures and Phase

Diagrams, (American Society for Metals, 1973).

83. Michel, P., Compt. rend., 235, 377 (1952).

84. Micro-Measurements Division, Measurements Group, Inc., Raleigh, NC

27611.

85. Miedema, A.R. and den Broeder, F.J.A., Z. Metallk. 70, 14 (1979).

86. Morris, Jr., J.W.; Tribula, D.; Summers, T.S.E.; Grivas, D., Solder Joint

Reliability Theory and Application, J.H. Lau Ed., (Van Nostrand Reinhold,

New York, 1991), Chapter 7.

87. Murphy, A.J., J. Inst. Metals, 35, 107 (1926).

Page 309: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

291

88. Nakahara, S.; McCoy, R.J.; Buene L.; and Vandenberg, J.M., Thin Solid

Films, 84, 185 (1981).

89. National Institute of Standards and Technology, Gaithersburg, MD

20899.

90. Nial, 0.; Almin, A.; and Westgren, A., Z. physik. Chem., B14, 83

(1931).

91. Nowotny, H. and Schubert, K., Naturwissenschaften, 32, 76 (1944).

92. Nowotny, H. and Schubert, K., Z. Metallkunde, 37, 23 (1946).

93. Obinata, I. and Schmid, E., Metallwirtschaft, 12, 101 (1933).

94. Ohriner, E.K., Welding Journal, 66, 191s (1987).

95. Oikawa, H. and Hosoi, A., Scripta. Met., 9, 823 (1975).

96. Okamoto, I. and Yasuda, T., Trans. JWRI, 15, 73 (1986).

97. Omishi, M. and Fujibuchi, A., Trans. JIM, 16, 539 (1972).

98. Onishi, M. and Fujibuchi, H., Trans. Japanese Inst. Metals, 16, 539

(1975).

99. Peatson, W.B., The Crystal Chemistry and Physics of Metals and Alloys,

(Wiley, New York, 1972), p. 135.

100. Pinizzotto, R.F.; Jacobs, E.G.; Wu, Y.; Sees, J.A.; Foster, L.A.; and

* Pouraphabagher, C., 31st Annual Proceeding, Reliability Physics 1993,

209 (1993).

101. Pinizzotto, R.F.; Wu, Y.; Jacobs, E.G.; and Foster, L.A., Proc. NEPCON

West '92, III, 1284 (1992).

102. Popoola, O.O.; Copper, J.J.; Jakstys, B.P.; and Kriven, W.M., Mat. Res.

Soc. Symp. Proc., 254, 271 (1992).

Page 310: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

292

103. Porter, D.A. and Easterling, K.E., Phase Transformations in Metals and

Alloys, 2nd Ed., (Chapman & Hall, New York, 1992), Chap. 1.

104. Pouraghabagher, C.; Jacobs, E.G.; and Pinizzotto, R.F., "In Situ

Transmission Electron Microscopy of Sn/Cu Intermetallic Formation",

Presented at the Texas Society for Electron Microscopy Symposium,

Austin, TX, October 22, 1992.

105. Preston, G.D., J. Inst. Metals, 35, 118 (1926).

106. Roming, Jr., A.D.; Chang, Y.A.; Stephens, J.J.; Frear, D.R.; Marcotte,

V.; and Lea, C., Solder Mechanics: A State of the Art Assessment, D.R.

Frear, W.B. Jones, K.R. Kinsman Eds., (TMS, PA, 1990), Chapter 2.

107. Saperstein, Z.P. and Howes, M.A., Welding Journal, 47, 162s (1968).

108. Sastry, S.M.L.; Peng, T.C.; Lederich, R.J.; Jerina, K.L.; and Kuo, C.G.,

Proc. NEPCON West '92, III, 1266 (1992).

109. Schubert, K. and Rosier, U., Z. Metallkunde, 41, 298 (1950).

110. Schwartz, L.H. and Cohen, J.B., Diffraction from Materials, (Springer-

Verlag, Berlin, 1987).

111. Shewmon, P.G., Transformations in Metals, (McGraw-Hill, New York,

1969).

112. Shimizu, R. and Murata, K., J. Appl. Phys., 42, 387 (1971).

113. Smallman, /?.£., Modern Physical Metallurgy, 4th Ed., (Butterworths,

London, 1985), Chapter 3.

114. Smith, F.G. and Thompson, J.H., Optics, (Wiley, New York, 1971).

115. Stephens, J.J., Internal Memorandum, March 2, 1989, Sandia National

Laboratories, Albuquerque, NM.

116. Stockburn, A., J. Inst. Metals, 66, 33 (1940).

Page 311: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

293

117. Stockdale, D., J. Inst. Metals, 49, 267 (1932).

118. Streitwolf, H.W., Ann. Phys., 3, 183 (Leipzig, 1959).

119. South Bay Technology, Inc., 1120 Via Callejon, San Clemente, CA

92672.

120. Sunwoo, A.J., Morris, Jr., J.W., and Lucey, Jr., G.K., Metallurgical

Transactions A, 23A, 1323 (1992).

121. Tamhankar, S.S., Chang, E.K., Wolf, R.J., and Kirschner, M.J., J.

Microcircuits & Electronic Packaging, 16, 23 (1993).

122. Ted Pella, Inc., 4595 Mountain Lakes Blud., Redding, CA 96003.

123. Tiller, W.A.; MrDjenovich, R., J. Appl. Phys., 34, 3639 (1963).

124. Tu, K.N., Acta, Meta., 21, 347 (1973).

125. Tu, K.N. and Thompson, R.D., Acta Meta., 30, 947 (1982).

126. Umanskiy, M.M., Zhur. Fiz. Khim., 14, 846 (1940).

127. Unsworth, D.A. and MacKay, C.A., Trans. Inst. Metal Finishing, 51, 85

(1973).

128. Veeco Instruments Inc., Terminal Drive, Plainview, NY.

129. Verhoeven, J.D.; Mourer, D.P.; and Gibson, E.D., Met. Trans. A, 8A,

1239 (1977).

130. Warren, B.E., X-Ray Diffraction, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, 1969).

131. Warwick, M.E. and Muckett, S.J., Circuit World, 9, 5 (1983).

132. Wassink, R.J.K., Soldering in Electronics, 2nd Ed., (Electrochemical

Publications, Scotland, 1989), Chapter 4.

133. Weart, H.W.and Mack, D.J., Trans. Met. Soc. AIME, 10, 664 (1958).

134. Wells, O.C., SEM/1977/I, IIT Research Institute, p.747, (Chicago, Illinois,

1977).

Page 312: DIFFUSION KINETICS AND MICROSTRUCTURE OF .../67531/metadc278545/...C.1 JEOL JEM-100 CX and JEOL JEM-200 CX Electron Microscope Performance Specifications 271 VIII LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

294

135. Westgren, A. and Phragmen, G., Z. anorg. chem., 175, 80 (1928).

136. Woodgate, R.W., Handbook of Machine Soldering, (Wiley, New York,

1983), Chapter 2.

137. Wu, Y.; Sees, J.A.; Pouraghabagher, C.; Foster, L.A.; Marshall, J.L.;

Jacobs, E.G.; and Pinizzotto, R.F., J. Electron. Mat., 22, 769 (1993).

138. Yeh, D.C. and Huntington, H.B., Phys. Rev. Lett., 53, 1469 (1984).

139. Yiyu, Q.; Hongyuan, F.; Dinghua, C.; Fuhua, F.; and Lixia, H., Brazing

and Soldering, 13, 39 (1987).

140. Zakraysek, L., Welding Journal, 51, 536s (1972).


Recommended